Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

ECC800 Data Center Controller V100R002C10 User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 278

ECC800 Data Center Controller

V100R002C10
User Manual

Issue 07

Date 2020-01-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2020. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://e.huawei.com

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the ECC800 data center controller in terms of features, devices, user
interfaces (UIs), and power-on commissioning, as well as frequently asked questions (FAQ)
and troubleshooting measures.
This document describes all the functions of the ECC800. Certain functions are implemented
by hardware such as the UPS and PDU, and may be unavailable if the hardware is not
connected to the ECC800.
The ECC800 functions described in the user manual are applicable to multiple FusionModule
solutions, and some functions may be applicable only to a few FusionModule solutions. For
details about the applicable ECC800 functions, see the FusionModule solution
documentation.
The figures provided in this document are for reference only.
The software version is ECC800 V100R002C10SPC400.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
 Sales engineers
 Technical support engineers
 Maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual About This Document

Symbol Description
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Supplements the important information in the main text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20)
Added the description about how to connect the Envicool SC15.

Issue 06 (2019-12-20)
Updated the safety information.

Issue 05 (2019-09-16)
 Added "Setting the Temperature Map".
 Added "How to Set and Add an MA01C PDC".
 Added the Card, password or fingerprint door access authorization mode.

Issue 04 (2019-08-31)
Added the description about how to set and add the AIRSYS Air Conditioner.

Issue 03 (2019-07-31)
 Added the description about how to connect the HT-500 dehumidifier.
 Deleted Wireless Components.
 Deleted Facial Recognition.

Issue 02 (2019-06-06)
 Added Facial Recognition.
 Added Wireless Components.

Issue 01 (2018-07-02)
This issue is the first official release.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual Contents

Contents

About This Document .................................................................................................................... ii


1 Safety Information ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 General Safety .............................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Personnel Requirements ............................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Electrical Safety ............................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.4 Installation Environment Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 6
1.5 Mechanical Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 7
1.6 Others............................................................................................................................................................................ 9

2 Overview....................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Positioning .................................................................................................................................................................. 11
2.2 Features ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11

3 Device Description ..................................................................................................................... 13


3.1 ECC800 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.2 Southbound Device Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 23
3.2.1 Rack Environment Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 23
3.2.2 Smart ETH Gateway ................................................................................................................................................ 24
3.2.3 Access Control System ............................................................................................................................................ 26
3.2.3.1 Aisle or Room Access Control System ................................................................................................................. 26
3.2.3.1.1 Access Actuator ................................................................................................................................................. 27
3.2.3.1.2 Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad ..................................................................................................... 31
3.2.3.1.3 Fingerprint and Card Reader .............................................................................................................................. 33
3.2.3.1.4 Card Reader with a Keypad ............................................................................................................................... 34
3.2.3.1.5 Magnetic Lock ................................................................................................................................................... 35
3.2.3.2 Cabinet Access Control System ............................................................................................................................ 36
3.2.4 AC Actuator ............................................................................................................................................................. 37
3.2.5 Skylight Actuator ..................................................................................................................................................... 40
3.2.6 Multi-Functional Sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 43
3.2.7 Smoke Detector ....................................................................................................................................................... 45
3.2.8 Temperature Sensor ................................................................................................................................................. 46
3.2.9 Alarm Beacon .......................................................................................................................................................... 46
3.2.10 (Optional) Smart U Space Manager ....................................................................................................................... 47
3.2.11 eLight Actuator ...................................................................................................................................................... 48

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual Contents

3.2.12 Water Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................... 50


3.2.12.1 WLDS600 Water Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 50
3.2.12.2 WLDS900 Water Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 51
3.2.12.3 Electrode Water Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 52
3.2.13 WiFi Module .......................................................................................................................................................... 53
3.2.14 ETH Converter....................................................................................................................................................... 54
3.2.15 PAD........................................................................................................................................................................ 56
3.2.16 T/H Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................. 58
3.2.16.1 T/H sensor (BOM number: 33010346) ............................................................................................................... 58
3.2.16.2 T/H Sensor (BOM number: 02310NBS)............................................................................................................. 59
3.2.16.3 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG)............................................................................................................ 61
3.2.17 Intelligent Battery Monitoring System .................................................................................................................. 61
3.2.17.1 iBOX ................................................................................................................................................................... 62
3.2.17.2 iBAT.................................................................................................................................................................... 72

4 UI Description ............................................................................................................................. 75
4.1 WebUI ......................................................................................................................................................................... 75
4.2 Mobile Phone App ...................................................................................................................................................... 81
4.3 Pad App....................................................................................................................................................................... 83

5 Power-On Commissioning ........................................................................................................ 85


5.1 Preparations and WebUI Login ................................................................................................................................... 85
5.2 Commissioning Configuration Wizard ....................................................................................................................... 89
5.3 Commissioning Event Notification............................................................................................................................. 90
5.4 Commissioning the New Main Way ........................................................................................................................... 94
5.5 Commissioning the eLight .......................................................................................................................................... 96

6 Feature Description..................................................................................................................... 99
6.1 Access Management ................................................................................................................................................... 99
6.1.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 99
6.1.1.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI port on the independent deployment AI_DI unit)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
6.1.1.2 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the Rack Environment Unit) ............... 100
6.1.2 Commissioning an Access Control Device and a Cabinet Electronic Lock ........................................................... 101
6.1.3 Commissioning the Exit Button, Skylight Button, Atmosphere Light, Emergency Button, and Magnetic Lock .. 105
6.1.4 Commissioning an Emergency Door Release Button ............................................................................................ 106
6.2 Video Management ................................................................................................................................................... 107
6.2.1 Preparing Documentation ...................................................................................................................................... 107
6.2.2 Networking Scenarios ............................................................................................................................................ 107
6.2.3 Commissioning a Camera (Smart ETH Gateway Networking Scenario) .............................................................. 108
6.2.3.1 Commissioning IPC6325 Cameras ..................................................................................................................... 108
6.2.3.2 Commissioning IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured) .................................................................................. 115
6.2.4 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch Networking Scenario) ........................................................................... 117
6.2.4.1 Commissioning IPC6325 Cameras ..................................................................................................................... 117

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual Contents

6.2.4.2 Commissioning IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured) .................................................................................. 120


6.2.5 Setting Parameters on the VCN WebUI ................................................................................................................. 123
6.2.6 Setting Parameters on the VCN IVS Client ........................................................................................................... 125
6.3 Linkage Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 128
6.3.1 Fire Control Linkage .............................................................................................................................................. 129
6.3.2 High Temperature Linkage .................................................................................................................................... 131
6.3.3 (Optional) Commissioning an Intelligent Aisle Light ............................................................................................ 132
6.4 PUE Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 135
6.4.1 Configuring PUE Standard Mode .......................................................................................................................... 136
6.4.2 Configuring PUE User-defined Mode ................................................................................................................... 137
6.4.3 Viewing PUE Data ................................................................................................................................................. 139
6.5 Battery Management ................................................................................................................................................. 140
6.5.1 Setting iBOX and iBAT Parameters....................................................................................................................... 140
6.5.2 Networking iBOXs and iBATs in Wireless Mode .................................................................................................. 141
6.6 Asset Management .................................................................................................................................................... 142
6.6.1 Determining the Position of the Smart U Space Manager ..................................................................................... 143
6.6.2 Querying the U Space Use Information ................................................................................................................. 143
6.7 Power Management .................................................................................................................................................. 144
6.7.1 Configuring Power Management Parameters ........................................................................................................ 144
6.7.2 Setting Fault Isolation Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 147
6.7.3 Viewing the Power Usage ...................................................................................................................................... 147
6.7.4 Viewing the Power Supply Links Diagram ............................................................................................................ 148
6.8 Cooling Capacity Management ................................................................................................................................ 150
6.8.1 (Optional) Setting Cooling Management Parameters ............................................................................................ 150
6.8.2 Viewing Cooling Capacity Usage Information ...................................................................................................... 151
6.8.3 (Optional) Setting Cooling Management Parameters ............................................................................................ 152
6.8.4 Viewing the Cooling Links Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 154
6.8.5 Setting the Temperature Map ................................................................................................................................. 156
6.9 Remote Management ................................................................................................................................................ 159
6.9.1 NetEco Management.............................................................................................................................................. 159
6.9.1.1 Connecting the Communications Cable .............................................................................................................. 159
6.9.1.2 Setting NetEco Parameters ................................................................................................................................. 159
6.9.1.3 Creating an ECC800 on the NetEco ................................................................................................................... 160
6.9.1.4 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function .................................................................................................. 161
6.9.2 Third-party NMS Management (over SNMP) ....................................................................................................... 164
6.9.2.1 Connecting the Communications Cable .............................................................................................................. 164
6.9.2.2 Setting SNMP Management Parameters ............................................................................................................. 164

7 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 167


7.1 Routine Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 167
7.2 Common Faults and Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 168
7.3 Component Replacement .......................................................................................................................................... 170

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual Contents

7.3.1 Replacing an ECC800 Main Control Module ........................................................................................................ 170


7.3.2 Replacing a PSU .................................................................................................................................................... 172
7.3.3 Replacing ECC800 Antennas ................................................................................................................................. 173
7.3.4 Replacing a SIM Card and Micro SD Card ........................................................................................................... 174

8 FAQ .............................................................................................................................................. 176


8.1 WebUI Operations .................................................................................................................................................... 176
8.1.1 Setting ECC800 Cascading .................................................................................................................................... 176
8.1.2 (Optional) Setting Device Performance Parameters .............................................................................................. 177
8.1.3 How Can I View Version Information? .................................................................................................................. 178
8.1.4 How Do I Set the Date and Time? ......................................................................................................................... 178
8.1.5 How to Check the System Type and Set the Smart Module Name ........................................................................ 179
8.1.6 How to Manage WebUI Users? ............................................................................................................................. 180
8.1.7 How Do I Create a Smart Module Plan View? ...................................................................................................... 182
8.1.8 How Do I Set and Add Devices? ........................................................................................................................... 185
8.1.8.1 How to Set and Add an Integrated UPS Parameters? ......................................................................................... 185
8.1.8.2 How to Set and Add a UPS2000-G? ................................................................................................................... 185
8.1.8.3 How to Set and Add a UPS5000-E? ................................................................................................................... 187
8.1.8.4 How to Set and Add a PDU8000 or integrated PDF (over Modbus-TCP)? ........................................................ 189
8.1.8.5 How to Set and Add a PDU8000 (over Modbus RTU)? ..................................................................................... 189
8.1.8.6 How to Set and Add a PDU2000?....................................................................................................................... 191
8.1.8.7 How to Set and Add an ATS? .............................................................................................................................. 193
8.1.8.8 How to Set and Add a PMAC615 AC Meter? .................................................................................................... 194
8.1.8.9 How to Set and Add a PMAC625 AC Meter? .................................................................................................... 196
8.1.8.10 How to Set and Add a PDC DC Meter? ............................................................................................................ 198
8.1.8.11 How to Set and Add an AC PDC MA01C? ....................................................................................................... 199
8.1.8.12 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A042 Parameters? .................................................................................... 200
8.1.8.13 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-C030 Parameters (over Modbus TCP)? .................................................... 201
8.1.8.14 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-C030 (over Modbus RTU)? ...................................................................... 202
8.1.8.15 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A025 Parameters (over MAC-Modbus)? ................................................. 203
8.1.8.16 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A025 Parameters (over Modbus-TCP)? ................................................... 204
8.1.8.17 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A010 Parameters (over MAC-Modbus)? ................................................. 205
8.1.8.18 How Do I Set NetCol5000CF_110HALF Parameters (Modbus-TCP)? ........................................................... 205
8.1.8.19 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000CF_110 Parameters (over Modbus-TCP)?................................................. 206
8.1.8.20 How to Set and Add a SUNRISE SCU-20K? ................................................................................................... 207
8.1.8.21 How to Set and Add a Rack-mounted HR04A.................................................................................................. 209
8.1.8.22 How Do I Add and Set an Envicool SC15? ...................................................................................................... 210
8.1.8.23 How Do I Add and Set an AIRSYS Air Conditioner? ...................................................................................... 211
8.1.8.24 How to Set and Add a Dehumidifier HT-500? .................................................................................................. 213
8.1.8.25 How to Set and Add an IP Device? ................................................................................................................... 213
8.1.8.26 How to Set and Add an Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit? ....................................................................... 214
8.1.8.27 How to Set and Add the Multi-functional Sensor? ........................................................................................... 216

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual Contents

8.1.8.28 How to Set and Add the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the ECC800)? .............................. 217
8.1.8.29 How to Set and Add the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the Skylight Actuator)? ............... 219
8.1.8.30 How to Set and Add the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the Rack Environment Unit)? ...... 220
8.1.8.31 How to Set and Add the WLDS900 Water Sensor? .......................................................................................... 221
8.1.8.32 How to Set and Add the WLDS600 Water Sensor? .......................................................................................... 222
8.1.8.33 How to Set and Add the Electrode Water Sensor? ............................................................................................ 223
8.1.8.34 How to Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the ECC800)? ........................ 224
8.1.8.35 How to Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to the NTC Port on the Rack Environment Unit)? . 225
8.1.8.36 How to Set and Add the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010346)? ................................................................... 226
8.1.8.37 How to Set and Add the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02310NBS)? ................................................................. 227
8.1.8.38 How to Set and Add the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG)? ................................................................. 229
8.1.9 How to Restore Factory Settings?.......................................................................................................................... 231
8.1.10 How Do I Install a Network Security Certificate? ............................................................................................... 232
8.1.11 How Can I Install a Device Access Certificate? .................................................................................................. 232
8.1.12 How Can I Change the ECC800 IP Address on the WebUI? ............................................................................... 233
8.1.13 How Do I Configure ECC800 Alarm Parameters? .............................................................................................. 233
8.1.14 How Can I View Real-Time Monitoring Data, Active Alarms, Historical Alarms, Access Event, and Operation
Logs? .............................................................................................................................................................................. 234
8.1.15 How Can I Handle Alarms? ................................................................................................................................. 235
8.1.16 How Can I View Performance Data? ................................................................................................................... 235
8.1.17 How Is a Signal Name Changed? ........................................................................................................................ 235
8.1.18 How Can I Export Historical Data and Device Data? .......................................................................................... 236
8.1.19 How Can I Export or Import a Configuration File? ............................................................................................. 237
8.1.20 How Can I Export Fault Information? ................................................................................................................. 238
8.1.21 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters? ...................................................................................................... 239
8.1.22 How Can I Handle DO Association Failure? ....................................................................................................... 239
8.1.23 What Do I Do If the ECC800 WebUI Display Language Changes from Chinese to English During Use? ......... 240
8.1.24 What Do I Do If the ECC800 Fails to Communicate with the UPS5000-E? ....................................................... 240
8.1.25 What Do I Do If a Message Indicating Unauthorized Fingerprint Is Displayed During Fingerprint Scanning on
the Access Control Device (Fingerprint Has Been Recorded)? ...................................................................................... 241
8.1.26 How Can I Rectify Camera Access Restriction? .................................................................................................. 241
8.1.27 How Should I Add the Devices Accessed Through a Smart ETH Gateway over Modbus-TCP to the ECC800
WebUI? ........................................................................................................................................................................... 242
8.1.28 How Should I Add the Devices Accessed Through a Smart ETH Gateway over Modbus-MAC to the ECC800
WebUI? ........................................................................................................................................................................... 243
8.1.29 How Should I Add Devices Accessed Through the ETH Converter to the ECC800 WebUI? ............................. 244
8.1.30 How Should I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800 COM Port to the ECC800 WebUI ........................ 246
8.1.31 How Should I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800 AI/DI Port to the ECC800 WebUI ........................ 247
8.1.32 How Should I Open Doors Remotely over the ECC800 WebUI ......................................................................... 249
8.1.33 How Should I Turn On or Off Aisle Lights in the Smart Module over the ECC800 WebUI? ............................. 250
8.1.34 How Should I Opening Skylights Remotely over the ECC800 WebUI? ............................................................. 251
8.1.35 How Should I Turn On or Off Smart Cooling Products over the ECC800 WebUI? ............................................ 252
8.1.36 How Should I Open the Cabinet Electronic Lock over the ECC800 WebUI ....................................................... 252

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual Contents

8.1.37 How Should I Link the Smoke Alarm with the Alarm Beacon over the ECC800 WebUI ................................... 253
8.1.38 How should I Link the AI/DI Alarm with the Alarm Beacon over the ECC800 WebUI...................................... 254
8.1.39 How Should I Modify Device Names over the ECC800 WebUI ......................................................................... 255
8.2 APP Operations ......................................................................................................................................................... 256
8.2.1 How to Connect to a WiFi Network ...................................................................................................................... 256
8.2.2 How to Prepare and Login App ............................................................................................................................. 256
8.2.3 How Do I Ensure that Device Positions in the Plan View Are Consistent with Actual Positions? ........................ 258
8.2.4 How to View Real-time Data? ............................................................................................................................... 259
8.2.5 How Can I Export and Import Data? ..................................................................................................................... 259
8.2.6 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters? ........................................................................................................ 260
8.2.7 How Can I Handle App Login Failure? ................................................................................................................. 261

9 PLC Function .............................................................................................................................. 262


9.1 Linkage Control Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 262
9.2 Linkage Control Configuration Examples ................................................................................................................ 263

10 Acronyms and Abbreviations ............................................................................................... 266

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

1 Safety Information

1.1 General Safety


Statement
Before installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment, read this document and observe
all the safety instructions on the equipment and in this document.
The"NOTICE", "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" statements in this document do
not cover all the safety instructions. They are only supplements to the safety instructions.
Huawei will not be liable for any consequence caused by the violation of general safety
requirements or design, production, and usage safety standards.
Ensure that the equipment is used in environments that meet its design specifications.
Otherwise, the equipment may become faulty, and the resulting equipment malfunction,
component damage, personal injuries, or property damage are not covered under the warranty.
Follow local laws and regulations when installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment.
The safety instructions in this document are only supplements to local laws and regulations.
Huawei will not be liable for any consequences of the following circumstances:
 Operation beyond the conditions specified in this document
 Installation or use in environments which are not specified in relevant international or
national standards
 Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code or removal of the product
 Failure to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions on the product and in
this document
 Equipment damage due to force majeure, such as earthquakes, fire, and storms
 Damage caused during transportation by the customer
 Storage conditions that do not meet the requirements specified in this document

General Requirements
 Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but not limited to
moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, inserting connectors to or removing
connectors from signal ports connected to outdoor facilities, working at heights, and
performing outdoor installation) in harsh weather conditions such as lightning, rain,
snow, and level 6 or stronger wind.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

 Before installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, remove any conductive


objects such as watches or metal jewelry like bracelets, bangles, and rings to avoid
electric shock.
 When installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, wear dedicated protective
gears such as insulation gloves, goggles, and safety clothing, helmet, and shoes, as
shown in the following figure.

 Follow the specified procedures for installation, operation, and maintenance.


 Before handling a conductor surface or terminal, measure the contact point voltage and
ensure that there is no risk of electric shock.
 After installing the equipment, remove idle packing materials such as cartons, foam,
plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.
 In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area, and turn on
the fire alarm bell or make an emergency call. Do not enter the building on fire in any
case.
 Do not stop using protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions, and related
precautionary measures in this document and on the equipment. Promptly replace
warning labels that have worn out.
 Keep irrelevant people away from the equipment. Only operators are allowed to access
the equipment.
 Use insulated tools or tools with insulated handles, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

 All cable holes should be sealed. Seal the used cable holes with firestop putty. Seal the
unused cable holes with the caps delivered with the cabinet. The following figure shows
the criteria for correct sealing with firestop putty.

 Do not scrawl, damage, or block any warning label on the equipment.


 Tighten the screws using tools when installing the equipment.
 Do not work with power on during installation.
 Repaint any paint scratches caused during equipment transportation or installation in a
timely manner. Equipment with scratches cannot be exposed to an outdoor environment
for a long period of time.
 Before operations, ensure that the equipment is firmly secured to the floor or other solid
objects, such as a wall or an installation rack.
 Do not use water to clean electrical components inside or outside of a cabinet.
 Do not change the structure or installation sequence of equipment without permission.
 Do not touch a running fan with your fingers, components, screws, tools, or boards
before the fan is powered off or stops running.

Personal Safety
 If there is a probability of personal injury or equipment damage during operations on the
equipment, immediately stop the operations, report the case to the supervisor, and take
feasible protective measures.
 To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

 Do not power on the equipment before it is installed or confirmed by professionals.

1.2 Personnel Requirements


 Personnel who plan to install or maintain Huawei equipment must receive thorough
training, understand all necessary safety precautions, and be able to correctly perform all
operations.
 Only qualified professionals or trained personnel are allowed to install, operate, and
maintain the equipment.
 Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect the
equipment.
 Personnel who will operate the equipment, including operators, trained personnel, and
professionals, should possess the local national required qualifications in special
operations such as high-voltage operations, working at heights, and operations of special
equipment.
 Professionals: personnel who are trained or experienced in equipment operations and are
clear of the sources and degree of various potential hazards in equipment installation,
operation, maintenance
 Trained personnel: personnel who are technically trained, have required experience, are
aware of possible hazards on themselves in certain operations, and are able to take
protective measures to minimize the hazards on themselves and other people
 Operators: operation personnel who may come in contact with the equipment, except
trained personnel and professionals
 Only professionals or authorized personnel are allowed to replace the equipment or
components (including software).

1.3 Electrical Safety


Grounding
 For the equipment that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first when
installing the equipment and remove the ground cable last when removing the
equipment.
 Do not damage the ground conductor.
 Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a properly installed ground conductor.
 Ensure that the equipment is connected permanently to the protective ground. Before
operating the equipment, check its electrical connection to ensure that it is securely
grounded.

General Requirements
Use dedicated insulated tools when performing high-voltage operations.

AC and DC Power

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

Do not connect or disconnect power cables with power on. Transient contact between the core
of the power cable and the conductor will generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause
fire or personal injury.
 If a "high electricity leakage" tag is attached on the equipment, ground the protective
ground terminal on the equipment enclosure before connecting the AC power supply;
otherwise, electric shock as a result of electricity leakage may occur.
 Before installing or removing a power cable, turn off the power switch.
 Before connecting a power cable, check that the label on the power cable is correct.
 If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before operating the
equipment.
 A circuit breaker equipped with a residual current device (RCD) is not recommended.
 A damaged power cable must be replaced by the manufacturer, service agent, or
professionals to avoid risks.
 High voltage operations and installation of AC-powered facilities must be performed by
qualified personnel.

Cabling
 When routing cables, ensure that a distance of at least 30 mm exists between the cables
and heat-generating components or areas. This prevents damage to the insulation layer of
the cables.
 Do not route cables behind the air intake and exhaust vents of the equipment.
 Ensure that cables meet the VW-1 flame spread rating requirements.
 Bind cables of the same type together. When routing cables of different types, ensure that
they are at least 30 mm away from each other.
 If an AC input power cable is connected to the cabinet from the top, bend the cable in a
U shape outside the cabinet and then route it into the cabinet.
 When the temperature is low, violent impact or vibration may damage the plastic cable
sheathing. To ensure safety, comply with the following requirements:
 Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than 0°C. Handle
cables with caution, especially at a low temperature.
 Cables stored at subzero temperatures must be stored at room temperature for at least 24
hours before they are laid out.
 Do not perform any improper operations, for example, dropping cables directly from a
vehicle.
 When selecting, connecting, and routing cables, follow local safety regulations and rules.

ESD

The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-sensitive
components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI) circuits.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

 Wear ESD gloves or a well-grounded ESD wrist strap when touching the device or
handling boards or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
 When holding a board, hold its edge without touching any components. Do not touch the
components with your bare hands.
 Package boards with ESD packaging materials before storing or transporting them.

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

Neutral-Ground Voltage
It is recommended that the three-phase loads be equalized and the neutral-ground voltage be
kept at less than 2 V to meet power distribution requirements.

1.4 Installation Environment Requirements


 To prevent fire due to high temperature, ensure that the ventilation vents or heat
dissipation system are not blocked when the equipment is running.
 Install the equipment in an area far away from liquids. Do not install it under areas prone
to condensation, such as under water pipes and air exhaust vents, or areas prone to water
leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation vents, or feeder windows of the
equipment room. Ensure that no liquid enters the equipment to prevent faults or short
circuits.
 If any liquid is detected inside the equipment, immediately disconnect the power supply
and contact the administrator.
 Do not expose the equipment to flammable or explosive gas or smoke. Do not perform
any operation on the equipment in such environments.
 Ensure that the equipment room provides good heat insulation, and the walls and floor
are dampproof.
 Install a rat guard at the door of the equipment room.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

Installation at Heights
 Working at heights refers to operations that are performed at least 2 meters above the
ground.
 Do not work at heights if the steel pipes are wet or other potential danger exists. After the
preceding conditions no longer exist, the safety director and relevant technical personnel
need to check the involved equipment. Operators can begin working only after obtaining
consent.
 When working at heights, comply with local relevant laws and regulations.
 Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work at heights.
 Before working at heights, check the climbing tools and safety gears such as safety
helmets, safety belts, ladders, springboards, scaffolding, and lifting equipment. If they do
not meet the requirements, take corrective measures or disallow working at heights.
 Wear personal protective equipment such as the safety helmet and safety belt or waist
rope and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on an insecure moveable object or
metal object with sharp edges. Make sure that the hooks will not slide off.
 Set a restricted area and eye-catching signs for working at heights to warn away
irrelevant personnel.
 Carry the operation machinery and tools properly to prevent them from falling off and
causing injuries.
 Personnel involving working at heights are not allowed to throw objects from the height
to the ground, or vice versa. Objects should be transported by tough slings, hanging
baskets, highline trolleys, or cranes.
 Ensure that guard rails and warning signs are set at the edges and openings of the area
involving working at heights to prevent falls.
 Do not pile up scaffolding, springboards, or other sundries on the ground under the area
involving working at heights. Do not allow people to stay or pass under the area
involving working at heights.
 Inspect the scaffolding, springboards, and workbenches used for working at heights in
advance to ensure that their structures are solid and not overloaded.
 Any violations must be promptly pointed out by the site manager or safety supervisor
and the involved personnel should be prompted for correction. Personnel who fail to stop
violations will be forbidden from working.

1.5 Mechanical Safety


Hoisting Devices
 Do not walk under hoisted objects.
 Only trained and qualified personnel should perform hoisting operations.
 Check that hoisting tools are available and in good condition.
 Before hoisting objects, ensure that hoisting tools are firmly secured onto a load-bearing
object or wall.
 Ensure that the angle formed by two hoisting cables is no more than 90 degrees, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

 Do not drag steel ropes and hoisting tools or bump hoisted objects against hard objects
during hoisting.

Using Ladders
 Use wooden or fiberglass ladders when you need to perform live working at heights.
 When a step ladder is used, ensure that the pull ropes are secured and the ladder is held
firm.
 Before using a ladder, check that it is intact and confirm its load bearing capacity. Do not
overload it.
 Ensure that the ladder is securely positioned. The recommended angle for a ladder
against the floor is 75 degrees, as shown in the following figure. An angle rule can be
used to measure the angle. Ensure that the wider end of the ladder is at the bottom, or
protective measures have been taken at the bottom to prevent the ladder from sliding.

 When climbing a ladder, take the following precautions to reduce risks and ensure
safety:
 Keep your body steady.
 Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder from the top.
 Ensure that your body's center of gravity does not shift outside the legs of the ladder.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

Drilling Holes
When drilling holes into a wall or floor, observe the following safety precautions:

Do not drill holes into the equipment. Doing so may affect the electromagnetic shielding of
the equipment and damage components or cables inside. Metal shavings from drilling may
short-circuit boards inside the equipment.
 Obtain the consent from the customer, subcontractor, and Huawei before drilling.
 Wear goggles and protective gloves when drilling holes.
 When drilling holes, protect the equipment from shavings. After drilling, clean up any
shavings that have accumulated inside or outside the equipment.

Moving Heavy Objects

When removing a heavy or unstable component from a cabinet, be aware of unstable or heavy
objects on the cabinet.
 Be cautious to avoid injury when moving heavy objects.

 When moving the equipment by hand, wear protective gloves to prevent injuries.
 Move or lift the equipment by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not hold the
handles of modules (such as power supply units, fans, and boards) that are installed in
the equipment because they cannot support the weight of the equipment.
 Avoid scratching the cabinet surface or damaging cabinet components and cables during
equipment transportation.
 When transporting the equipment using a forklift truck, ensure that the forks are properly
positioned to ensure that the equipment does not topple. Before moving the equipment,
secure it to the forklift truck using ropes. When moving the equipment, assign dedicated
personnel to take care of it.
 Choose railways, sea, or a road with good condition for transportation to ensure
equipment safety. Avoid tilt or jolt during transportation.
 Move a cabinet with caution. Any bumping or falling may damage the equipment.

1.6 Others
 Exercise caution when shutting down the smart cooling product. Doing so may cause
equipment and room overheating, which will damage the equipment.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 1 Safety Information

 Exercise caution when powering off the rPDU or PDU2000. Doing so may affect the
power supply to equipment, which will interrupt services.
 Exercise caution when manually shutting down the UPS inverter for transferring to
bypass mode, or when adjusting the UPS output voltage level or frequency. Doing so
may affect the power supply to equipment.
 Exercise caution when setting battery parameters. Incorrect settings will affect the power
supply and battery lifespan.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 2 Overview

2 Overview

2.1 Positioning
The ECC800 is the core component for the smart module local management. It is intelligent,
flexible in connection, easy to maintain, and reliable. It adopts the POE bus for expansion,
and allows all intelligent monitoring devices to be flexibly laid out so that it can manage the
devices in the smart module.

2.2 Features
 Efficient
− Supports access of wireless devices and provides backup routes, reducing cable
layout workload and enhancing reliability.
− Supports unlocking through the access card, password and fingerprint.
− Supports remote alarm notifications by SMS and email.
− Supports power supply and communication over the power over Ethernet (POE) bus,
providing rich bandwidth resources and high communication efficiency.
− Supports remote upgrade, fault data export, and configuration parameter
synchronization.
− Supports the connection of eight in-room access control devices and four cameras
for a single smart module.
− Cascades a maximum of three ECC800s, displays the active alarms and power
usage effectiveness (PUE) data of cascaded ECC800s on the WebUI of one
ECC800.
− Collects statistics on the instantaneous PUE and average PUE of the smart module
and displays the statistics on a dashboard and in curves, so that you can query the
power consumption of the smart module in real time
− Supports the function of transparent transmission over the RS485 port, so that
southbound components can communicate with the NetEco after accessing the
ECC800.
− Allows you to modify device performance parameters and query historical
performance data.
− Supports asset management, power management, and cooling capacity management,
allowing a grasp of dynamic information about the smart module in a timely
manner, and facilitating effective management.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 2 Overview

− Supports deployment wizard, which provides commissioning guidance.


 Simple
− Supports local WiFi hotspots. After you install the WiFi module at the USB port on
the ECC800, you can connect to the ECC800 using the app on the mobile phone or
tablet computer to view the basic information about the smart module, such as
layout, resources, energy efficiency, environment, and alarms. This increases
usability.
− Supports query of device information in real time using the pad app or mobile
phone app, facilitating operation and maintenance.
− Supports connection of NE monitoring devices to the POE bus in plug-and-play
mode for auto-discovery and auto-registration requiring no configuration. This
feature enables fast delivery and higher maintainability.
 Reliable
− Supports intelligent linkage management which allows customization of linkage
logic, achieving intelligent operation and maintenance.
− Supports dual power inputs, providing high reliability.
− Supports intelligent battery monitoring management, which allows monitoring of
cell voltage and internal resistance for discovery of failed cells.
− Supports automation functions such as fire control linkage and smoke alarm
linkage.
− Supports a POE ring network, reducing networking fault points and providing high
reliability.
− Supports cabinet-level magnetic locks, door status sensor, and temperature
monitoring, providing high security.
− Interconnects with the NetEco and supports the SNMP, allowing central
management over various scenarios and modules.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

3 Device Description

3.1 ECC800
The ECC800 consists of power supply units (PSUs) and an ECC800 main control module and
monitors the equipment and environment in the smart module.

Figure 3-1 ECC800 (front view)

(1) PSU (2) PSU (3) Status indicator


(4) 3G/4G antenna port (5) FE ports (6) AI/DI_1–6 sensor
Manufacturer: Guangdong (WAN_1–WAN_2 and input port
Shenglu Telecommunication Tech. LAN_1–LAN_2)
Co., Ltd.
Model: SL10802U
(7) RF_Z antenna port (8) SW button (9) DO_1–2 dry
Manufacturer: Guangdong contact output
Shenglu Telecommunication Tech.
Co., Ltd.
Model: SL15334H
(10) RS485 port 12V (COM1–4) (11) Default button (12) USB port
(13) ECC800 main control module

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-2 ECC800 (rear view)

(1) 53.5V DC_OUT1 (2) 53.5V DC_OUT2 (3) AC_INPUT1


(4) AC_INPUT2

Figure 3-3 ECC800 main control module (side view)

(1) SIM card slot (2) Micro-SD card slot

ECC800 Specifications

Table 3-1 ECC800 environmental specifications

Item Specifications

Working temperature –20°C to +50°C


Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)
Altitude 0–4000 m (When the altitude is between 3000 m and 4000 m,
the temperature decreases by 1°C for each additional 200 m.)

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-2 ECC800 structural specifications

Item Specifications
Dimensions (L x W x H) 442 mm x 330 mm x 43.6 mm
Color Black
Installation Can be installed in a 1 U space in a standard
19-inch cabinet
Environmental protection RoHS5

Table 3-3 ECC800 technical specifications

Item Specifications
Power input  Supports two AC inputs
 Rated voltage: 200–240 V AC/100–120 V AC
 Rated frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power output  Output voltage: 42–58 V DC (rated voltage: 53.5 V DC)
 Output power of two power module supplies: 2000 W (176–300
V AC); 940 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)
 Output power of a single power module supply: 1000 W
(176–300 V AC); 470 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)
FE port expansion Supports two WAN ports, two LAN ports, and 10/100M
communications rate
RS485 serial port  Supports four RS485 ports with the default communications rate
expansion of 9600 bit/s.
 Each port provides 12 V DC power with the rated current of 450
mA.
AI/DI expansion  Supports six AI/DI ports to connect to smoke sensors, water
(RJ45) sensors, and temperature sensors.
 Each port provides 12 V DC power with the rated current of 85
mA.
DO expansion Two DO ports. Each port supports passive and active DO.
(RJ45)  Supports passive (dry contact) DO ports with contact point
capacity of 20 W, maximum withstand voltage of 60 V DC, and
rated current of 500 mA.
 Supports active DO ports with the output voltage of 12 V DC
and output current of 450 mA.
Wireless Supports wireless communication that complies with
communication IEEE802.15.4.
3G (optional) Supports 3G (WCDMA) communication and is compatible with 2G

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
(GSM) communication. A standard SIM card slot is provided.
NOTE
The prerequisite for using a SIM card is that the site has signal coverage.

USB  After installing the WiFi module, connect the WiFi module to
the ECC800 using the app on the mobile phone or tablet
computer to view the basic information about the smart module,
such as layout, resources, energy efficiency, environment, and
alarms.
 Insert a USB flash drive to export historical data, device data,
fault information, and configuration files, and import or export
the device configuration data and historical data.
Button  SW: wireless network pairing button
 Default: restores the default IP address

Table 3-4 ECC800 RF parameters

Model Name Specifications

ECC800 RF_Z Operation Frequency 2405 MHz–2480 MHz


RF_Z EIRP (max.) 5 dBm
3G Operation Frequency WCDMA BAND: 850 MHz–2100
MHz
GSM: 850 MHz–1900 MHz
3G EIRP (max.) 36 dBm
Software version V100

Indicators

Table 3-5 Indicators on the ECC800 main control module

Indicator Color Name Status Description


RUN Green Running Steady on The power supply is normal, the
status program is being loaded, or WiFi
indicator WPS is pairing.
Off The power supply is abnormal.
Blinking at The software runs properly (the
long indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for
intervals 1s and then off for 1s) or the
ECC800 registers with the
NetEco successfully.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Name Status Description


Blinking at The ECC800 does not register
short with the NetEco (the indicator
intervals blinks at 4 Hz, on for 0.125s and
then off for 0.125s).
ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm is
indicator generated.
Off The system is normal.
RF_Z Green Communica Steady on No network parameters exist, or
tion status a network is to be created.
indicator
Blinking at A network is set up, and no node
long access is allowed (the indicator
intervals blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for 1s and
then off for 1s).
Blinking at A network is set up, and node
super short access is allowed (the indicator
intervals blinks at 10 Hz, on for 0.05s and
then off for 0.05s).
3G Green 3G status Steady on The 3G module is powered on.
indicator
Off The 3G module stops running, or
no 3G module is configured.
Blinking at The 3G module succeeds in
long dial-up (the indicator blinks at
intervals 0.5 Hz, on for 1s and then off for
1s).
Blinking at The 3G module registers with the
short operator network successfully
intervals (the indicator blinks at 4 Hz, on
for 0.125s and then off for
0.125s).

Table 3-6 PSU indicator description

Indicator Colo Name Status Description


r
Gree Power Steady on The converter has a power input.
n indicator
Off The converter has no power input or
is faulty.
Blinking at The converter is being queried (the
long intervals indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for 1s
and then off for 1s).
Blinking at The converter application program

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Colo Name Status Description


r
short intervals is being loaded (the indicator blinks
at 4 Hz, on for 0.125s and then off
for 0.125s).
Yell Alarm Steady on The converter generates a
ow indicator forewarning indicating that power
will be limited due to ambient over
temperature, or generates a
protection shutdown alarm due to
ambient over temperature or under
temperature.
Power input overvoltage or
undervoltage protection
Reverse DC input connection
Slight current imbalance
Output overvoltage
Hibernation
Off The converter generates no
protection alarms.
Blinking at The communication between the
long intervals converter and the outside is
interrupted (the indicator blinks at
0.5 Hz, on for 1s and then off for
1s).
Red Fault Steady on The converter locks out due to
indicator output overvoltage.
The converter delivers no output
due to internal faults.
Off The converter is working properly.

Wireless Network Pairing (SW) and IP Address Reset (Default) Buttons

Table 3-7 Wireless network pairing and IP address reset buttons

Button Function Operation Description Indicator Status


Name Description

SW Wireless In non-wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator


network RF_Z pairing mode, press and hold down is blinking at super
(802.15.4) the button for 1.2s to 5s to enter the short intervals.
pairing wireless network pairing mode.
In wireless network (802.15.4) The RF_Z indicator

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Button Function Operation Description Indicator Status


Name Description
pairing mode, press and hold down is blinking at long
the button for 1.2s to 5s to exit the intervals.
pairing mode; or the system
automatically exits the pairing mode
after 30 minutes without pressing
the button.
Press and hold down the button for The RF_Z indicator
more than 6s to clear network is on.
parameters.
WiFi pairing In non-WiFi pairing mode, press the  When the system
button button for less than 1.2s to enter the enters the pairing
NOTE WiFi pairing mode. mode, the RUN
This function is
indicator is
supported only steady on.
in a scenario  After pairing
where the WiFi
succeeds, the
converter is
configured. RUN indicator
blinks just as
before WiFi
pairing.
 If pairing does
not succeed in 3
minutes, the RUN
indicator blinks
just as before
WiFi pairing.
Default IP address reset Hold down the button for at least 3s. None
Then the IP addresses for the
ECC800 WAN_1 and WAN_2
ports will restore to the default
addresses.

Communications Ports
The ECC800 provides the following communications ports. Figure 3-4 shows the pins of the
RJ45 port.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-4 RJ45 port pins

There are four FE ports, that is, two WAN ports (WAN_1 and WAN_2) and two LAN ports
(LAN_1 and LAN_2). Table 3-8 provides the FE port pin definitions.

Table 3-8 FE port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin sequence Pin 1 TX+


Pin 2 TX-
Pin 3 RX+
Pin 4 N/A
Pin 5 N/A
Pin 6 RX-
Pin 7 N/A
Pin 8 N/A
Indicator Green Linked, steady on
indicator
Yellow ACT data communication, blinking
indicator

There are four RS485 ports (COM1/12V–COM4/12V). Table 3-9 provides the RS485 port pin
definitions.

Table 3-9 RS485 port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin sequence Pin 1 RS485+


Pin 2 RS485–
Pin 3 12 V DC_OUT
Pin 4 RS485+

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Description
Pin 5 RS485–
Pin 6 N/A
Pin 7 N/A
Pin 8 GND
Indicator Green Power output indicator
indicator  Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
 Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

There are six AI/DI dry contact inputs (AI/DI_1–6). Table 3-10 provides the AI/DI port pin
definitions.

 Pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 identify sensor types.


 Pin 3 and Pin 8 are power output ports.
 Pin 6 and Pin 7 collect sensor data. Pin 7 can detect current type sensors (4–20 mA). Pin 6 and Pin 7
can detect the output status of passive dry contact type sensors. Pin 3 and Pin 7 can detect
temperature sensors.

Table 3-10 AI/DI port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin sequence Pin 1 Type_1


Pin 2 Type_2
Pin 3 12 V DC
Pin 4 Type_3
Pin 5 Type_4
Pin 6 DI-
Pin 7 DI+
Pin 8 GND
Indicator Green Power output indicator
indicator  Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
 Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

There are two DO dry contact outputs (DO_1 and DO_2). Table 3-11 provides the DO port
pin definitions.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-11 DO port pin definitions

Item Description
Pin sequence Pin 1 N/A
Pin 2 N/A
Pin 3 12 V DC_OUT
Pin 4 N/A
Pin 5 N/A
Pin 6 DO_NO
Pin 7 DO_COM
Pin 8 GND
Indicator Green Power output indicator
indicator  Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.
 Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-12 USB port pin definitions

Item Description
Pin sequence Pin 1 5V
Pin 2 DM
Pin 3 DP
Pin 4 GND

Power Ports
The ECC800 provides four power ports, including two AC input ports (AC_INPUT1 and
AC_INPUT2) and two DC output ports (DC_OUTPUT1 and DC_OUTPUT2). Table 3-13
provides the power port pin definitions.

Table 3-13 Power port pin definitions

Port Type Pin Description

AC Pin 1 L
Pin 2 PE
Pin 3 N
DC Pin 1 48V+
Pin 2 48VGND

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

3.2 Southbound Device Introduction


3.2.1 Rack Environment Unit
The rack environment unit collects and controls the environmental data of IT cabinets in the
smart module.

Figure 3-5 Rack environment unit

(1) Ground port (2) 48 V DC power input (3) POE port (4) COM1/12V
port port
(5) COM2/12V (6) COM3 port (7) COM4 port (8) NTC1-3
port
(9) NTC4-6 (10) AI/DI_1 port (11) AI/DI_2 port (12) 12V_1 port
(13) 12V_2 port (14) BLINK button (15) Status
indicator

Specifications

Table 3-14 Technical specifications for the rack environment unit

Item Specifications

Power input  DC input: Terminal, with input voltage of 36–60 V DC


 POE input: One POE port that complies with IEEE802.3at.
12 V power Two 12 V DC power outputs with the rated output current of 250 mA
output
POE port FE communication with the rate of 10/100M
RS485 serial  Four RS485 ports with the default communications rate of 9600 bit/s
port  Among the four RS485 ports, two support 12 V DC, 400 mA power
expansion output.
 The other two are isolated, with the default communications rate of
9600 bit/s, and do not support power output.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
AI/DI input Two active 12 V DC, 200 mA AI/DI input ports
Temperature Provides two RJ45 ports to connect to six temperature sensors, each RJ45
sensor port port connecting to three temperature sensors.
BLINK Provides a BLINK function.
button

Indicators
Table 3-15 lists the structural specifications for the rack environment unit.

Table 3-15 Indicator description

Indicator Color Name Status Description


PWR Green Power input Steady on The power input is normal.
status
indicator Off There is no power input.

RUN Green Module Off The power is abnormal or


running the board program is
status loading.
indicator
Blinking at The software runs properly
long (the indicator blinks at 0.5
intervals Hz, on for 1s and then off
for 1s).
Blinking at POE communication fails
short (the indicator blinks at 4 Hz,
intervals on for 0.125s and then off
for 0.125s).
Blinking The indicator blinks at super
short intervals for 0.5s
(blinking at 10 Hz, on for
0.05s and then off for 0.05s)
and then turns off for 0.5s.
The cycle lasts for 10s.
ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm is
indicator generated.
Off No system alarm is
generated.

3.2.2 Smart ETH Gateway


A smart ETH gateway allows the extension of the 53.5 V DC power supply and FE
communication for the ECC800 and can be flexibly deployed in a smart module.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-6 Smart ETH gateway

(1) PWR_IN (2) FE_1 cascading (3) POE_1–2 (4) POE_3–4 ports
cascading power port signal port ports
(5) 48V_OUT1 (6) 48V_OUT2 (7) FE_2 (8) PWR_OUT
power output port power output port cascading signal cascading power port
port
(9) BLINK button (10) Status indicator

Specifications

Table 3-16 Technical specifications for a smart ETH gateway

Item Specifications
Power input PWR_IN D-type power input terminal, for power cascading, input voltage
range: 45–55 V DC
Power of a single smart ETH gateway: max (2.7 A , 48 V DC); power of
cascaded smart ETH gateways: max (25 A, 48 V DC)
Power output  PWR_OUT D-type power output terminal, for power cascading, output
voltage range: 45–55 V DC
 48V_OUT1 and 48V_OUT2, terminal (1 A,48 V DC), output voltage
range: 45–55 V DC
FE port Two FE ports, RJ45 terminal with an indicator, 10/100M communication
rate, for the cascading between smart ETH gateways and the
communication with the upper computer
POE port Four POE ports, RJ45 terminal with an indicator, 10/100M
communications rate, complying with IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u,
IEEE802.3af/at
BLINK If you press the BLINK button, the RUN indicator blinks intermittently at
button super short intervals (blinking at super short intervals for 0.5s and then off
for 0.5s) for 5 seconds.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicators

Table 3-17 Indicators on a smart ETH gateway

Indicator Color Name Status Description


PWR Green Power input Steady on The power input is normal.
status indicator
Off There is no power input.
RUN Green Module Off The power supply is
running status abnormal.
indicator
Blinking at The smart ETH gateway
long successfully registers with
intervals the ECC800 and the software
runs properly (the indicator
blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for 1s
and then off for 1s).
Blinking at The smart ETH gateway does
short not register with the ECC800
intervals (the indicator blinks at 4 Hz,
on for 0.125s and then off for
0.125s).
Blinking The indicator blinks at super
short intervals for 0.5s
(blinking at 10 Hz, on for
0.05s and then off for 0.05s)
and then turns off for 0.5s.
The cycle lasts for 10s.
ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm is
indicator generated.
Off No system alarm is
generated.

3.2.3 Access Control System


The access control system applies to the equipment room, aisle containment, and cabinet
doors.

3.2.3.1 Aisle or Room Access Control System


The access control system collects and monitors data about the access of devices and
personnel to ensure access security.
Diverse access control devices such as the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad,
fingerprint and card reader, and card reader with a keypad are supported. Note that the
communication distance between an access control device and an access actuator should be
less than or equal to 5 meters.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

If the IC cards used by the access control device need to be purchased, the IC card chip specifications
are as follows.

Table 3-18 IC card chip specifications

Item Specifications
Chip model S50
Chip name Mifare 1K (S50) card
Chip type Philips Mifare 1 IC S50
Operating frequency 13.56 MHz
Read/write distance 1–3 cm
Storage capacity 8 Kbit, 16 partitions

The emergency button or emergency door release button is used to open a door in
emergencies.
 The emergency button can disconnect the power supply to the lock and therefore unlock
the door in case of emergency.
 In case of emergency, break the glass of the emergency door release button to disconnect
the power supply to the lock and therefore unlock the door.

3.2.3.1.1 Access Actuator


The access actuator is the control component for the aisle door in a smart module. It connects
to the ECC800 controller over FE port, wireless networking (802.15.4). It opens the magnetic
lock by detecting the card swiping information of the card reader, door open button
information, and fire linkage information. It has access right management, access event record,
and alarm record functions.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-7 Access actuator

(1) 48 V power port (2) POE port (3) RS485 port COM2
(4) RS485 port COM1 (5) Address DIP switch (6) Status indicator
(7) BLINK button (8) WG_2 Wiegand (9) WG_1 Wiegand interface
interface
(10) AI/DI_2 dry (11) AI/DI_1 dry (12) LOCK/GND/GATE/COM door
contact (Reserved port contact (Reserved port status or magnetic lock port
for linkage control or for exit button)
third-party fire
extinguishing system
dry contacts)

Specifications

Table 3-19 Access actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications
Power input  DC input: Terminal, with input voltage of 36–60 V DC
 POE input: One POE port that complies with IEEE802.3at.
POE port FE communication, 10/100M communications rate
Wireless One wireless communication port that complies with
communication IEEE802.15.4, mutual backup with FE communication

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
AI/DI port Two AI/DI ports, can connect to the fire alarm and exit button
DO/DI port  One 12 V DC power output that controls magnetic locks,
terminal
 One DI input port for connecting to the door status switch
RS485 serial port Two RS485 ports (one route) with the default communications rate
expansion of 9600 bit/s, physical port cascading supported (reserved function)
Wiegand interface Two Wiegand interfaces, 12 V DC card reader operating power
output; two routes of card readers (non-fingerprint readers) can
operate at the same time.
BLINK button  Press the button for less than 1 second to start blinking.
 Hold down the button for 1–5 seconds to search for a network
and start networking.
 Hold down the button for more than 10 seconds to clear
network parameters.
Address DIP switch 4-pin address DIP switch
E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-20 Access actuator indicator description

Indicator Color Name Status

PWR Green Power input status  Steady on: The power


indicator input is normal.
 Off: There is no
power input.
RUN Green Communication status  Off: The power is
indicator abnormal or the
board program is
loading.
 Blinking at long
intervals: The access
actuator successfully
registers with the
ECC800 and the
software runs
properly (the
indicator blinks at 0.5
Hz, on for 1s and
then off for 1s).
 Blinking at short
intervals: The

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Name Status


communication is
disconnected or the
access actuator fails
to register with the
ECC800 (the
indicator blinks at 4
Hz, on for 0.125s and
then off for 0.125s).
 Blinking: The
indicator blinks at
super short intervals
for 0.5s (blinking at
10 Hz, on for 0.05s
and then off for
0.05s) and then turns
off for 0.5s. The
cycle lasts for 10s.
ALM Red Alarm indicator  Steady on: A system
failure alarm is
generated.
 Off: No system alarm
is generated.
RF_Z Green Wireless communication  Steady on: No
status indicator network parameters
exist, or a network is
to be created.
 Blinking at long
intervals: A network
is set up, and no node
access is allowed (the
indicator blinks at 0.5
Hz, on for 1s and
then off for 1s).
 Blinking at super
short intervals: A
network is set up, and
node access is
allowed (the indicator
blinks at 10 Hz, on
for 0.05s and then off
for 0.05s).
 Blinking
intermittently at super
short intervals: The
access actuator is
searching for a
network (the
indicator blinks at
super short intervals
for 0.5s and then

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Name Status


turns off for 0.5s).

Communications Ports
The access actuator provides one DO port (LOCK/GND) and one DI port (GATE/COM).
Table 3-21 lists the LOCK/GND/GATE/COM port pin definitions.

Table 3-21 LOCK/GND/GATE/COM port pin definitions

Item Description
LOCK/GND LOCK 12V_OUT
(control
magnetic GND GND
locks) pin
sequence
GATE/COM GATE DI1
(door status)
pin sequence COM COM

3.2.3.1.2 Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad

Figure 3-8 Fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

The following uses the old fingerprint and card reader with a keypad as an example. The new and old
fingerprint and card readers have the same appearance, but have different indicator colors when the
device is collecting a fingerprint. For details, see "Access control device operating status."

(1) Fingerprint reader (2) LED indicator

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-22 Specifications for the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Item Specifications
Dimensions (L x W x H) 156 mm x 53 mm x 38 mm
Rated operating voltage 12 V DC ±15%
Rated operating current 300 mA ±15%
Card type supported IC card
Authorized storage A maximum of 3000 authorized users, with a maximum
of 6000 fingerprints
Communications mode RS485 and Wiegand communications ports

Table 3-23 Access control device operating status

Item Old Version New Version


Standby LED indicator The indicator is The indicator is
steady blue. steady blue.
Fingerprint reader The indicator is The indicator is off.
steady green.
Unauthorized LED indicator The indicator blinks The indicator blinks
fingerprint blue, red, blue, red, blue, red, blue, red,
collection and blue in order. and blue in order.
Fingerprint reader The indicator is The indicator turns
steady green. on (white).
Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds
three. three.
Authorized LED indicator The indicator blinks The indicator blinks
fingerprint blue, red, and blue blue, red, and blue
collection in order. in order.
Fingerprint reader The indicator is The indicator turns
steady green. on (white).
Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds
once. once.
Card swiping LED indicator The indicator blinks The indicator blinks
blue, red, and blue blue, red, and blue
in order. in order.
Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds
once. once.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

3.2.3.1.3 Fingerprint and Card Reader

Figure 3-9 Fingerprint and card reader

(1) Fingerprint reader (2) LED indicator

Table 3-24 Fingerprint and card reader

Item Specifications
Dimensions (L x Wx H) 156 mm x 53 mm x 38 mm
Rated operating voltage 12 V DC ±5%
Rated operating current 300 mA ±5%
Card type supported IC card
Authorized storage A maximum of 3000 authorized users, with a maximum
of 6000 fingerprints
Communications mode RS485 and Wiegand communications ports

Table 3-25 Access control device operating status

Item Old Version New Version


Standby LED indicator The indicator is The indicator is
steady blue. steady blue.
Fingerprint reader The indicator is The indicator is off.
steady green.
Unauthorized LED indicator The indicator blinks The indicator blinks
fingerprint blue, red, blue, red, blue, red, blue, red,
collection and blue in order. and blue in order.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Old Version New Version


Fingerprint reader The indicator is The indicator turns
steady green. on (white).
Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds
three. three.
Authorized LED indicator The indicator blinks The indicator blinks
fingerprint blue, red, and blue blue, red, and blue
collection in order. in order.
Fingerprint reader The indicator is The indicator turns
steady green. on (white).
Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds
once. once.
Card swiping LED indicator The indicator blinks The indicator blinks
blue, red, and blue blue, red, and blue
in order. in order.
Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds
once. once.

3.2.3.1.4 Card Reader with a Keypad

Figure 3-10 Card reader with a keypad

Table 3-26 Specifications of a card reader with a keypad

Item Specifications
Dimensions (L x W x H) 114 mm x 63 mm x 25 mm

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
Operating voltage Operating voltage range: 10.8–13.2 V DC; rated voltage:
12 V DC
Operating current Static standby current80 mA, dynamic operating current
(card swiping, key pressing) 150mA, minimum input
current 12 V DC/300 mA
Communications mode Wiegand communications port

3.2.3.1.5 Magnetic Lock

Figure 3-11 Double door magnetic lock

Figure 3-12 Single door magnetic lock

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-13 Magnetic lock for a sliding door

3.2.3.2 Cabinet Access Control System


The cabinet access control system applies to cabinets in the aisle containment to ensure data
and device security.

Electronic cabinet lock


Features:
 An IC card can be used after being authorized using software.
 An IC card can be authorized for one lock or all locks.
 Door opening information is recorded through a network.
 The system displays the status of cabinet doors and locks in real time, the system
displays the status of cabinet doors and locks in real time and reports the unauthorized
door opening.
 The system supports remote unlocking.

Figure 3-14 Electronic cabinet lock

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-27 Cabinet electronic lock specifications

Item Specifications
Rated input voltage 12 V DC
Rated current 200–300 mA
Unlock mode Unlocking with a powered card
Card type supported IC card
Mechanically unlock Supported

Mechanical Code Lock


Features:
 The cabinet door can be opened with only the key and without the password.
 The cabinet door can be opened with only the password and without the key.
 The user can set a password.
 A password should contain at least three digits.
 The password can be reset if the user forgot it.

Figure 3-15 Mechanical code lock

3.2.4 AC Actuator
The AC actuator is used in a smart module to control the lighting inside the smart module by
receiving commands from the access control system or host, infrared linkage information
(disabled by default), or signals from the light button. It also provides a charging port for the
pad.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-16 AC actuator

(1) AC OUT2 port (2) AC OUT1 port (3) AC IN port (4) Status indicator
(5) BLINK button (6) AI/DI dry (7) COM1–2 RS485
contact port

Specifications

Table 3-28 AC actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications
Power input One AC input, 100–240 V AC.
Power output  AC OUT1: two AC outputs, 100–240 V AC, maximum total
current: 5 A. The built-in relay can connect or disconnect the
circuit.
 AC OUT2: one AC output, 100–240 V AC, maximum
current: 5 A. Supplies power continuously.
Wireless One wireless communication port, complying with
communication IEEE802.15.4.
RS485 port One route of dual RS485 ports, not isolated (reserved).
AI/DI detection Two AI/DI dry contacts, connecting to two light buttons.
BLINK button  Press the button for less than 1 second to start blinking.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
 Hold down the button for 1–5 seconds to search for a network
and start networking.
 Hold down the button for more than 10 seconds to clear
network parameters.

Indicators

Table 3-29 AC actuator indicators

Indicator Color Name Status Description

Power Green Power status Steady on The power input is normal.


indicator
Off There is no power input.
RUN Green Running Off The power is abnormal or the
status board program is loading.
indicator
Blinking at The AC actuator successfully
long intervals registers with the ECC800 and
the software runs properly (the
indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on
for 1s and then off for 1s).
Blinking at The communication is
short intervals disconnected or the AC
actuator fails to register with
the ECC800 (the indicator
blinks at 4 Hz, on for 0.125s
and then off for 0.125s).
Blinking The indicator blinks at super
short intervals for 0.5s
(blinking at 10 Hz, on for
0.05s and then off for 0.05s)
and then turns off for 0.5s. The
cycle lasts for 10s.
ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm is
indicator generated.
Off No system alarm is generated.
RF_Z Green Communicati Steady on No network parameters exist,
on status or a network is to be created.
indicator
Blinking at A network is set up, and no
long intervals node access is allowed (the
indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on
for 1sand then off for 1s).
Blinking at A network is set up, and node
super short access is allowed (the indicator

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Name Status Description


intervals blinks at 10 Hz, on for 0.05s
and then off for 0.05s).
Blinking The AC actuator is searching
intermittently for a network (the indicator
at super short blinks at super short intervals
intervals for 0.5sand then turns off for
0.5s).

3.2.5 Skylight Actuator


The skylight actuator controls the rotating skylight on the aisle containment of the smart
module through the alarm linkage information from the fire extinguishing system or the
control information from the upper computer. The skylight actuator supports E-labels and
wireless networking (802.15.4).

Figure 3-17 Skylight actuator

(1) LOCK/GND (2) BUTTON/GND (3) AI/DI_1 sensor (4) AI/DI_2 sensor
magnetic lock DO window open button input port input port
output port DI input port
(5) BLINK button (6) Status indicator (7) Address DIP (8) COM1 port
switch
(9) COM2 port (10) POE port (11) 48 V power port

Specifications

Table 3-30 Skylight actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
Power input  DC input: Terminal, with input voltage of 36–60 V DC
 POE input: One POE port that complies with IEEE802.3 at.
POE port FE communication with the rate of 10/100M
Wireless One wireless port that complies with IEEE802.15.4, mutual backup
communication with FE communication
AI/DI port Two AI/DI ports for detecting fire extinguishing linkage signals;
smoke detection signals also supported
DO output One 12 V DC power output for controlling the skylight magnetic lock;
driving six skylight magnetic locks simultaneously
DI input One DI input port for connecting to the window open button
BLINK button  Hold down the button for less than 1 second to start blinking.
 Hold down the button for 1–5 seconds to search for a network and
start networking.
 Hold down the button for more than 10 seconds to clear network
parameters.
Address DIP 4-pin address DIP switch
switch
E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-31 Skylight actuator indicator description

Indicator Color Name Status Description

Power Green Power input Steady on The power input is normal.


status indicator
Off There is no power input.
RUN Green Operating Off The power is abnormal or the
status indicator board program is loading.
Blinking at The skylight actuator
long intervals successfully registers with the
ECC800 and the software runs
properly (the indicator blinks at
0.5 Hz, on for 1s and then off for
1s).
Blinking at The communication fails or the
short intervals skylight actuator fails to register
with the ECC800 (the indicator
blinks at 4 Hz, on for 0.125s and
then off for 0.125s).

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Name Status Description


Blinking The indicator blinks at super
short intervals for 0.5s (blinking
at 10 Hz, on for 0.05s and then
off for 0.05s) and then turns off
for 0.5s. The cycle lasts for 10s.
ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm is
indicator generated.
Off No system alarm is generated.
RF_Z Green Communicatio Steady on No network parameters exist, or
n status a network is to be created.
indicator
Blinking at A network is set up, and no node
long intervals access is allowed (the indicator
blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for 1sand
then off for 1s).
Blinking at A network is set up, and node
super short access is allowed (the indicator
intervals blinks at 10 Hz, on for 0.05s and
then off for 0.05s).
Blinking The skylight actuator is
intermittently searching for a network (the
at super short indicator blinks at super short
intervals intervals for 0.5s and then turns
off for 0.5s).

Communications Ports
The skylight actuator provides one DO port (LOCK/GND) and one DI port (BUTTON/GND).
Table 3-32 lists the LOCK/GND/BUTTON/GND port pin definitions.

Table 3-32 LOCK/GND/BUTTON/GND port pin definitions

Item Description
LOCK/GND LOCK 12V_OUT
pin sequence
GND GND
BUTTON/GN BUTTON DI3
D pin
sequence GND GND

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

3.2.6 Multi-Functional Sensor


A multi-functional sensor integrates the temperature and humidity (T/H) sensor, smoke sensor
and infrared detection. The multi-functional sensor can connect to the ECC800 over FE or
wireless communication.

The infrared detection function is enabled only when the intelligent lighting function is enabled.

Figure 3-18 Multi-functional sensor

(1) Address DIP switch (2) BLINK button (3) TEST button
(4) RF_Z indicator (5) RUN indicator (6) ALM indicator

Specifications

Table 3-33 Multi-functional sensor technical specifications

Item Specifications
Temperature –40°C to 80°C. Precision ≤ ±0.5 °C (0-50 °C).
monitoring
Humidity 0 to 100%RH. Precision ≤ ±5% RH (25 °C, 20%–80% RH).
monitoring
Smoke Complies with Ul217. The smoke sensor generates an alarm when
monitoring testing 3.2% weak dust for each foot.
POE port One POE port that complies with IEEE802.3 at.
RS485 port Reserves one RS485 port.
DI input One DI input port, 12 V DC power input.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
BLINK button Wireless communication:
 Press the button for less than 1 second to start blinking.
 Hold down the button for 1–5 seconds to search for a network and
start networking.
 Hold down the button for more than 10s to clear network
parameters.
Smoke sensor Supported
test button
E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-34 Description of the indicators on the multi-functional sensor

Indicator Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Module Blinking at The multi-functional sensor


running status long successfully registers with
indicator intervals the ECC800 and the software
runs properly (the indicator
blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for 1s
and then off for 1s).
Blinking at The multi-functional sensor
short fails to register with the
intervals ECC800 or the
communication fails (the
indicator blinks at 4 Hz, on
for 0.125s and then off for
0.125s).
Blinking The indicator blinks at super
short intervals for 0.5s
(blinking at 10 Hz, on for
0.05s and then off for 0.05s)
and then turns off for 0.5s.
The cycle lasts for 10s.
ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm or
indicator smoke alarm is generated.
Off No system alarm is
generated.
RF_Z Green Communicati Steady on No network parameters exist,
on status or a network is to be created.
indicator
Blinking at A network is set up, and no
long node access is allowed (the
indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Name Status Description


intervals for 1s and then off for 1s).
Blinking at A network is set up, and
super short node access is allowed (the
intervals indicator blinks at 10 Hz, on
for 0.05s and then off for
0.05s).
Blinking The multi-functional sensor
intermittentl is searching for a network
y at super (the indicator blinks at super
short short intervals for 0.5s and
intervals then turns off for 0.5s).

3.2.7 Smoke Detector


Smoke detectors are used to detect the smoke concentration.

Figure 3-19 Smoke detector

Table 3-35 Technical specifications of a smoke detector

Item Specifications

Operating voltage DC12V (9–16 V DC)


Quiescent current < 8 mA
Alarm current < 35 mA
Output mode Relay output

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
Output contact capacity 3 A/120 V AC or 3 A/24 V AC
Operating temperature –10ºC to +50ºC
Ambient humidity < 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions Diameter: 112 mm, height: 41 mm

3.2.8 Temperature Sensor


The temperature sensor (the BOM code: 3301034) is used for the surface temperature
measure, industrial process control, measurement instrument, etc.

Figure 3-20 Temperature sensor

Table 3-36 Temperature sensor specifications

Item Specifications
Measurement range –20ºC to +70ºC
Measurement precision ±1ºC (25°C)
Operating temperature –10ºC to +55ºC
Operating voltage 10–16 V DC
Storage temperature –40ºC to +70ºC

3.2.9 Alarm Beacon


When a fire occurs or smokes are generated in the micro-modular equipment room, the alarm
beacon generates an audible signal and flashes to inform operators of fire and security risks.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-21 Alarm beacon

Table 3-37 Structural specifications of an alarm beacon

Item Specifications
Dimensions (L x W x H) 130 mm x 75 mm x 55 mm
Installation requirements Installed on a wall
Environmental RoHS, Reach
requirements

Table 3-38 Technical specifications of an alarm beacon

Item Specifications
Power input RJ45 port, input voltage 9–16 V DC, operating current ≤ 400
mA
Sound pressure ≥ 100 ±3 dB/30 cm
Continuous operating ≥ 45 min
time

3.2.10 (Optional) Smart U Space Manager


The smart U space manager is designed for IT asset management of the data center. The
system automatically detects the physical location of IT devices in the data center, collects IT
asset codes and the information about U space usage.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-22 Smart U space manager

(1) Asset detection strip (2) U space electronic label (3) Main control box

Table 3-39 Technical specifications of the smart U space manager

Item Specifications
Characteristic Applicable to 42 U cabinets
Communications port RS485, Modbus-RTU
Communication Rate: 9600 bps
Communication format: one start bit, eight data bits, no
parity bit, one stop bit
Power input 12 V DC±5% (RJ45)
Rated current and power 250 mA
consumption
Data upload port One RS485 route (two RJ45 ports)
Dimensions (mm) Main control box: 71 mm x 70 mm x 25 mm
Detection strip: 1867 mm x 18 mm x 6.5 mm (H x W x
D)
Weight ≤ 0.2 kg (main control box), ≤ 0.35 kg (asset detection
strip)
Installation mode Magnet-based installation

3.2.11 eLight Actuator


The eLight actuator has the function of associating alarms, access authorization status, and
atmospheres.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-40 eLight functions

Light of the eLight Cause


eLight Strip Strip Light
Light Lighting
Specificati
ons

Red light Steady on The smart module raises a critical alarm.


Blinking for Access authorization fails and the aisle door cannot be
3 seconds opened.
Blinking The eLight fails to communicate with the ECC800.
Orange light Steady on The smart module raises a major alarm.
Yellow light Steady on The smart module raises a minor alarm.
Grey light Steady on The smart module raises a warning.
Green light Blinking for Access authorization succeeds and the door can be
3 seconds opened.
Blue light Steady on Associated alarm severity is set to None.
Other color Steady on or The device is abnormal or cables are incorrectly
light blinking connected to terminals R, G, and B.

Figure 3-23 eLight actuator

Table 3-41 eLight actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications
Dimensions (L x W x H) 112 mm x 76 mm x 35 mm

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
Power input DC input: terminal, with the input voltage of 24 V DC
Power output AC output: terminal, with the output voltage of 120 V AC
RS485 port (RJ45) Two RS485 ports, support cascading
Installation requirement Install on a guide rail
Operating temperature 4–40 °C
Ambient humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

3.2.12 Water Sensor


A water sensor detects water on the floor in real time and generates an alarm when water is
detected.

3.2.12.1 WLDS600 Water Sensor


The WLDS600 water sensor with the BOM number of 33010556 consists of a water detection
cable, a water detector, an extension line, and a conversion cable.

Figure 3-24 WLDS600 water sensor

(1) Tie line (2) Water leakage location cable (3) End cap

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

(4) Extension line (5) Water leakage locator

Table 3-42 WLDS600 water sensor specifications

Item Specification
Dimensions (H 70 mm x 58 mm x 86 mm ±1
x W x D)
Power supply 9–16V DC or 9–16V AC
Impulse current ≤ 450 mA
Power <2W
dissipation
Power, RJ45 female connector 1 piece
communication
connector
Protocol type Modbus-RTU, data bits 8bits, no parity
Baud rate, Default support 9600, baud rate setable, address setable, default address
address is 1, stop bit is 1bit.
Detected distant 100m (support cable connection in series)
Accuracy ±0.5 m (the cable length 0-10 m)
1 m±1% (the cable length 10-100 m)
Alarm Light When the power supply is working properly, the green indicator is on.
state When a fault occurs, the yellow indicator is on. When water leakage
occurs, the red indicator is on.
Display 4-bits Nixie tube shows leaking position.
Adjustable 3 grade of sensitivity
Sensitivity
Installation DIN track install supported.

3.2.12.2 WLDS900 Water Sensor


The WLDS900 water sensor with the BOM number of 33010352 consists of a water detection
cable, a water detector, and a conversion cable.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-25 WLDS900 water sensor

(1) Water detector (2) Conversion cable end A, connected (3) Conversion cable
to the water detector
(4) Conversion cable (5) Water detection cable end A, (6) Water detection
end B, connected to connected to the conversion cable cable
the water detection
cable

Table 3-43 WLDS900 water sensor specifications

Item Specification
Operating 12 V DC (9–16 V DC)
voltage
Operating –20°C to +70°C
temperature
Storage –40°C to +85°C
temperature
Humidity 10%–80% RH (non-condensing)

3.2.12.3 Electrode Water Sensor


The electrode water sensor with the BOM number of 33010444 contains electrode probes and
cables.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-26 Electrode water sensor

Table 3-44 Electrode water sensor technical specifications

Item Specification
Operating –40°C to +80°C
temperature
Storage –40°C to +80°C
temperature
Service life 10 years

3.2.13 WiFi Module


The WiFi module provides WiFi signals for equipment such as pads and mobile phones to
interact with the host computer.

Figure 3-27 WiFi module

Table 3-45 Technical specifications

Item Specifications
Wireless standard IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, and IEEE 802.11b

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
Network  11n: up to 150 Mbps
bandwidth  11g: up to 54 Mbps
 11b: up to 11 Mbps
Frequency band 2.4-2.4835 GHz
Wireless 20 dBm (MAX EIRP)
transmission
power
Supported Windows 2000/XP/Vista/Linux/Win 7
operating system
Ports USB 2.0 high-speed connector
Voltage range 5.0 V DC±5%
Operating -20°C to +70°C
temperature
Storage -40°C to +90°C
temperature
Relative humidity 10%–90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 5%–90% RH (non-condensing)
Power < 0.8 W

3.2.14 ETH Converter


The ETH converter is used to convert the Modbus–RTU protocol or CAN protocol to the
Modbus-MAC protocol for connecting to the POE bus.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-28 ETH converter

(1) Status indicator (2) BLINK button (3) COM1 communications port
(4) COM2 communications port (5) 48 V power port (6) POE port

Specifications

Table 3-46 ETH converter technical specifications

Item Specifications
Power input  DC input: Terminal, with input voltage of 36–60 V DC
 POE power supply: One POE port, 10/100M communication rate,
complying with IEEE802.3at
RS485 or Provides two RS485/CAN ports. The default communications rate for the
control area RS485 port is 9600 bit/s, and that for the CAN port is 125 kbit/s. Both
network ports match the RJ45 terminal shared by RS485 and CAN.
(CAN)
BLINK If you press the BLINK button, the RUN indicator blinks intermittently at
button super short intervals (blinking at super short intervals for 0.5s and then off
for 0.5s) for 10 seconds.
E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-47 ETH converter indicators

Indicator Color Name Status Description

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Name Status Description


PWR Green Power input Steady on The power input is normal.
status
indicator Off There is no power input.

RUN Green Operating Off The power supply is


status abnormal.
indicator
Blinking at The ETH converter
long intervals successfully registers with the
ECC800 and the software
runs properly (the indicator
blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for 1s
and then off for 1s).
Blinking at The communication fails or
short the ETH converter fails to
intervals register with the ECC800 (the
indicator blinks at 4 Hz, on
for 0.125s and then off for
0.125s).
Blinking The indicator blinks at super
short intervals for 0.5s
(blinking at 10 Hz, on for
0.05s and then off for 0.05s)
and then turns off for 0.5s.
The cycle lasts for 10s.
ALM Red Alarm Steady on A system failure alarm is
indicator generated.
Off No system alarm is
generated.

3.2.15 PAD
The pad allows the wireless access from the data center management system. You can monitor
the equipment in the data center and environmental parameters in real time over the APP.
Figure 3-29 shows a pad.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-29 PAD

Table 3-48 Pad structural specifications

Item Specifications
Dimensions (L x W x 243 mm × 164 mm × 7.8 mm
H)
Weight About 460 g

Table 3-49 PAD technical specifications

Item Specifications
Touchscreen 10.1-inch, IPS full view, IPS screen, and capacitive five-point
touch
Store  Machine: 32 GB
 Memory: 3 GB
 LPDDR3 extension card: microSD, a maximum of 256 GB
(non-standard configuration)
Button/Port  Touch button + power switch and volume button
 3.5 mm stereo headphones port
 Micro SD card port
 MicroUSB port
Camera  Rear camera: 8-megapixel, F2.0 aperture, automatic focus
 Front camera: 2-megapixel, F2.4 aperture, fixed focus
 Sensor type: BSI
 Flash: not supported
 Video recording: rear camera up to 1080 pixels at 30 FPS;
front camera up to 720 pixels at 30 FPS
 Zoom mode: digital zoom
 Photo resolution: rear camera up to 8 M (3264 x 2448

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Item Specifications
pixels); front camera up to 1.9 M (1600x 1200 pixels)
Battery  Materials: Li-polymer
 Capacity: 5100 mAh (typical value) or 4980 mAh (rated
value)
 Wi-Fi connection/web page browse time: about 6.5 hours
 Power adapter charge time: about 3.5 hours (5 V 2A adapter)

3.2.16 T/H Sensor


3.2.16.1 T/H sensor (BOM number: 33010346)

Figure 3-30 Appearance

The T/H sensor uses an RJ45 connector.

Figure 3-31 Pins of an RJ45 connector

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-50 Pin description of an RJ45 connector

Pin Description
Pin 1 A
Pin 2 B
Pin 3 V+
Pin 4/5/6/7 Reserved
Pin8 V-

Table 3-51 T/H sensor specifications

Item Specifications
Temperature measuring range -20°C to 70°C
Temperature accuracy ≤ ±0.3°C (25°C)
Humidity measuring range 0%–100% RH
Humidity accuracy ≤ ±5% RH (25°C, 30%–80% RH)
Operating temperature -20°C to 70°C
Operating voltage 9–16 V DC
Storage temperature -40°C to 80°C (non-condensing)
Output RS485

3.2.16.2 T/H Sensor (BOM number: 02310NBS)

Figure 3-32 Appearance

(1) Status indicator (2) RS485_IN


(3) RS485_OUT (4) Address DIP switch

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

The RS485 communications ports of the T/H sensor use RJ11 (6P6C) connectors.

Figure 3-33 Pins of an RJ11 connector

Table 3-52 Pin description of an RJ11 connector

Pin Description
Pin 1 or Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 RS485-
Pin 4 RS485+
Pin 5 or Pin 6 12V

Table 3-53 Temperature and humidity sensor specifications

Item Specifications
Temperature measuring range –20°C to +70°C
Temperature accuracy ±1°C
Operating temperature –10°C to +55°C
Operating voltage 9–16 V DC
Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C
Output RS485

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

3.2.16.3 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG)

Figure 3-34 Appearance

(1) RS485-OUT (2) RS485-IN (3) DIP switch (4) Button


(5) NTC1-3 (6) NTC4-6 (7) Display

Table 3-54 Temperature and humidity sensor specifications

Item Temperature Humidity

Measurement range – 40°C to +70°C 1%–99% RH


Precision ≤ ±1°C (25°C) ≤ ±5% RH (25°C, 20%–80% RH)
Extended temperature Provides two RJ45 ports to connect six NTC temperature
collection port sensors, each RJ45 port connecting to three NTC
temperature sensors.
Signal port RS485
Power supply 5 –16 V DC (typical value 12 V DC)
Power consumption < 180 mW
Storage environment – 40°C to +70°C
Weight About 85 g

3.2.17 Intelligent Battery Monitoring System


The intelligent battery monitoring system consists of the iBOX (CIM) and iBAT (BIM).

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

The iBOX is an intelligent battery management module that collects wireless communication
data from the downstream iBAT groups, collects and analyzes the operating data of battery
strings, calculates state of charge (SOC) and state of health (SOH) of batteries and battery
strings and estimates the battery health status accordingly, supports battery tripping
management, and uploads data to the management unit through COM or POE ports.
The iBAT is a battery monitoring module that monitors the voltages, internal resistances, and
pole temperatures of batteries.
In the scenario with battery cabinets, the iBOX is installed inside a smart module battery
cabinet and the iBOX communications cable connects to a smart ETH gateway.
(Optional) When a battery system needs to be managed by multiple iBOXs, the iBOXs can be
connected to northbound devices using straight-through cables (the ECC800 supports four
iBOXs in parallel through the smart ETH gateway) without cascading.

Figure 3-35 Connecting the iBOX signal cable

3.2.17.1 iBOX
iBOX is a battery information collection module. It collects battery status data from the
downstream iBAT groups through wireless communication, and sends the data to the ECC,
UPS, and the third-party network management system (NMS) through COM or POE ports.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Appearance

Figure 3-36 iBOX front view

(1) –48 V 0.5 A port (2) POE port (3) COM_IN port (RS485
(power input) communication input)
(4) COM_OUT port (5) DI and DO ports (6) HALL_1–HALL_8
(RS485 communication current monitoring ports
output)
(7) RF_Z antenna port (8) BCB_1–BCB_4 ports (9) BCB_OUT and BCB_IN
(BCB_2–BCB_4 reserved) ports
(10) Networking switch (11) PWR indicator (12) RUN indicator
(13) ALM indicator (14) RF_Z indicator (15) Delivered antenna

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Figure 3-37 iBOX bottom view

(1) Fastener (2) Micro SD card slot


(3) Default button (IP (4) ADDR dual in-line package (DIP) switch (RS485
reset) communications address)
(5) 12 V 2 A port (power
input)

Power Port

Figure 3-38 Power port pins

Table 3-55 12 V, 2 A port pin definitions

Pin Definition Description


1 – In this scenario, an external
power module is adopted to
2 + supply 12 V DC operating
voltage.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-56 –48 V, 0.5 A port pin definitions

Pin Definition Description


1 + The system provides 48 V
DC operating voltage in this
2 – scenario.

POE Port

Figure 3-39 POE port pins

Table 3-57 POE port pin definitions

Pin Definition Description

1 TX+ Supports power supply


through the POE port. The
2 TX– terminal is an RJ45 terminal
with an indicator.
3 RX+
4, 5 P45_P1
6 RX–
7, 8 P78_P1

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

COM Port

Figure 3-40 COM port pins

Table 3-58 COM port pin definitions

Pin Signal Description


1 RS485+ Two cascaded RS485
communication ports
2 RS485–
3 NC
4 RS485+
5 RS485–
6 GND
7 NC
8 NC

DI and DO Ports

Table 3-59 DI and DO port pin definitions

Pin Definition Signal Status Initial Remarks


Description Description Status
1 + Dry contact  Open: The Open Dry contact
input signal dry input and
2 – contact output signal
input is
open.
 Closed:
The dry
contact

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Pin Definition Signal Status Initial Remarks


Description Description Status
input is
closed.
3 NO Dry contract  Open: The Open
output signal dry
4 COM contact
output is
open.
 Closed:
The dry
contact
output is
closed.

HALL Current Monitoring Port

Figure 3-41 HALL current monitoring port pins

Table 3-60 HALL current monitoring port pin definitions

Pin Definition Description

1 +12 V Detect the charge and discharge currents of four battery strings
or eight battery routes.
2 –12 V
3 AI
4 GND

 If the battery string is configured with the neutral wire, measure the currents of the positive and
negative battery string cables. If the battery string is not configured with the neutral wire, measure
the current of either the positive or negative battery string cable. The following uses the scenario
where the battery string is configured with the neutral wire as an example.
 When an iBOX manages multiple battery strings, first connect the Hall effect sensors on the positive
and negative cables of battery string 1 respectively to the corresponding ports on the iBOX. Then
connect the Hall effect sensors on battery string 2 to the iBOX in the same way, and so on.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

 If the positive or negative battery string cable is too thick to be routed through the Hall effect sensor,
or the measurement range of the Hall effect sensor is not enough, use multiple Hall effect sensors to
monitor the current of one battery string. The iBOX supports the sum of the monitoring results of
multiple Hall effect sensors, which is set through Multi-Hall cur. setting.
 The value of Multi-Hall cur. setting equals the number of positive or negative Hall effect sensors in
a single battery string and should be greater than or equal to 1.

BCB Port

Figure 3-42 BCB port pins

Table 3-61 BCB_1–BCB_4 port pin definitions

Pin Definition Signal Status Initial Remarks


Description Description Status

1 OL Monitors  Grounded: Disconnected The four BCBs can


whether the BCB separately manage
BCB box is connected. tripping of four battery
connected  Disconnected: routes.
BCB not
connected.
2 STA Monitors the  Grounded: Disconnected
battery circuit The battery
breaker circuit breaker
is ON.
 Disconnected:
The battery
circuit breaker
is OFF.
3 DRV Controls battery  0 V: There is 0V
circuit breaker no driving
trip and outputs signal for
12 V driving BCB tripping.
signals  12 V: There is
4 GND Secondary side a driving
ground signal for
BCB tripping.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Table 3-62 BCB_IN and BCB_OUT cascading port pin definitions

Pin Definition BCB_IN BCB_OUT Status Description Initial Description


Signal Signal Status
Description Description

1 OL Specifies Specifies  Grounded: BCB Disconnected Receives


whether the whether the connected. BCB
BCB connects cascaded  Disconnected: commands
to the signal BCBs connect BCB not sent by the
output port. to the signal connected. UPS and
input port. supports
BCB port
2 STA Signal output Monitors  Grounded: The Disconnected cascading
port for the whether the battery circuit management.
battery circuit cascaded breaker is ON.
breaker status BCBs are  Disconnected:
connected to The battery
the input. circuit breaker is
OFF.
3 DRV Controls battery circuit breaker  0 V: There is no 0V
trip and receives 12 V driving driving signal for
signals BCB tripping.
 12 V: There is a
4 GND Secondary side ground
driving signal for
BCB tripping.

DIP Switch

Table 3-63 DIP switch description

No. Definition Description


1 ADDR_1 RS485 communications
address setting
2 ADDR_2
3 ADDR_3
4 ADDR_4

Indicators

Table 3-64 Indicator description

Indicator Color Meaning Status Description Measure


RF_Z Green Wireless Steady on No network Requires no
communica parameters exist. handling.
(A network is to be

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Meaning Status Description Measure


tion status created.)
Blinking at A network is being
super short created (new nodes
intervals allowed).
Blinking at Data is being
long transmitted (new
intervals nodes not
allowed).
RUN Green Northbound Blinking at The Requires no
communica long communication is handling.
tion status intervals normal.
Blinking Blinking, lasting Requires no
intermittent for 10s. handling.
ly at super
short
intervals
Blinking at Communication 1. Check
short fails. (No whether the
intervals legitimate communicati
northbound data on cable is
has been received loose.
for 3 minutes.)  If yes,
reconnect
the
communi
cation
cable.
 If no, go
to the
next step.
2. Check
whether the
device is
malfunctioni
ng.
 If yes,
replace
the
device.
 If no,
contact
Huawei
technical
support.
ALM Red Alarm Steady on The actual number Check the value
indicator of online devices is of iBAT
less than the value number, the

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicator Color Meaning Status Description Measure


of iBAT number. iBAT cable
connection, and
the iBAT
indicators.
Off The actual number Requires no
of online devices handling.
equals the value of
iBAT number.
PWR Green Power Steady on Board power Requires no
indicator indicator. handling.

 If an indicator blinks at long intervals, it is blinking at 0.5 Hz, that is, on for 1s and then off for 1s.
 If an indicator blinks at short intervals, it is blinking at 4 Hz, that is, on for 0.125s and then off for
0.125s.
 If an indicator blinks at super short intervals, it is blinking at 10 Hz, that is, on for 0.05s and then off
for 0.05s.
 Blinking intermittently at super short intervals means an indicator blinks at super short intervals for
0.5s and then remains off for 0.5s.

Networking Switch

Table 3-65 Networking switch description

Name Definition Function


Button pressing Press the button for less iBOX blinking function
than 1s.
Button pressing Press and hold the button Creates a network if no network has
for more than 1s but less been created. Switches between network
than 5s. organization and data transmission if a
network has been created.
Button holding Press and hold the button Clears the current network (including
down for more than 10s but less the network parameters of all the online
than 20s. iBATs).

Default Button

Table 3-66 Default button description

Name Definition Function


Default button Hold down the button Reset to the default IP address
for more than 10 (192.168.0.10)
seconds.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

3.2.17.2 iBAT
The iBAT is a battery monitoring module that monitors the voltages, internal resistances, and
pole temperatures of batteries and supports 12 V power.

Features
 Monitors the voltages, internal resistances, and pole temperatures of 12 V batteries.
 Supports the hibernation function. (When it detects that the battery voltage is low, it will
enter the low-power mode.)
 Communicates with the iBOX wirelessly.

iBAT Appearance

Figure 3-43 iBAT2.0

Figure 3-44 iBAT3.0

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Indicators

Table 3-67 Indicator description

Indicator Color Silk Status Description


Screen

Running Green RUN Off Power consumption is low or the


iBAT is not powered on.
Blinking at The networking has started but not
super short completed.
intervals
Blinking at The networking succeeds.
long intervals
Alarm Red ALM Off The iBAT is not faulty.
Steady on  The iBAT is faulty.
 Communication with the iBOX
times out.
 No network is connected. (The
iBAT is waiting to connect to a
network.)
Blinking at  Network parameters are being
super short cleared.
intervals  The iBAT is blinking.
(iBattery 2.0)
Blinking at
short intervals
(iBattery 3.0)

 If an indicator blinks at long intervals, it is blinking on for 1s and then off for 1s.
 If an indicator blinks at super short intervals, it is blinking at 10 Hz, that is, on for 0.05s and then off
for 0.05s.
 If an indicator blinks at super short intervals, it is blinking at 4 Hz, that is, on for 0.125s and then off
for 0.125s.

Networking Switch

Table 3-68 Networking switch description

Name Definition Function


Button pressing Press the button for less Searches for and joins a network if there is no
than 5 seconds. network. Initializes the network parameters if
there is a network.
Button holding Hold down the button Clears the current network and resets the

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 3 Device Description

Name Definition Function


down for more than 5 wireless module; disconnects the network.
seconds.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

4 UI Description

4.1 WebUI
For data transmission security, the ECC800 supports WebUI access through TLS.

Figure 4-1 Home page

WebUI Introduction

Table 4-1 WebUI introduction

Main Second- Third-Level Function Factor Remarks


Menu Level Menu y
Menu Defaul
ts
Restor
ationa

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

Main Second- Third-Level Function Factor Remarks


Menu Level Menu y
Menu Defaul
ts
Restor
ationa

Home Plan NA  View and Yes NA


View manage the
layout view of
devices.
 View the system
PUE (including
the instantaneous
mPUE value and
average PUE
value) in a
dashboard and
the system trend
curve.
Active NA View active alarms. No NA
Alarms
Multi-M NA View the status of Yes NA
odule each cascaded
Monitori ECC800.
ngb
Monitori System Connected Monitor the device Yes For example, in the path of
ng devices, such as running information Monitoring > ECC800 >
ECC800, ETH in real time, set Running Parameters:
Converter device running  AI/DI_1 sensor-AI/DI_6
Group, and parameters, and sensor is Disable by default.
Smart ETH control the device
 IP device num is 100 by
Gateway Group. running. For
example, set smart default.
cooling product  Online detection timeout
parameters, delete interval is 30 by default.
devices failing in
Power Connected communication, and Yes NA
Distributi devices, such as set AI/DI device
on Integrated PDU, parameters.
PDU8000, and
Power
Distribution
Unit
Aisle Connected Yes NA
devices, such as
Multi-Functiona
l Sensor Group,
Access Actuator
Group, and
Skylight

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

Main Second- Third-Level Function Factor Remarks


Menu Level Menu y
Menu Defaul
ts
Restor
ationa
Actuator Group
Cooling Connected Yes –
smart cooling
products.
Cabinet IT cabinet Yes NA
Query Historica NA Query historical No NA
l Alarms alarms.
Performa NA Query device No NA
nce Data performance data.
Operatio NA Query operation No NA
n Log logs.
Access NA Query access control No NA
Event events.
Export NA Export historical No NA
Data data and device data.
System System Site Set the system type Yes Smart module name is
Settings Paramete Configuration and site ID. FusionModule by default.
rs System type is
FusionModule2000 by default.
NOTE
If System type is General, the
ECC800 is a general collector that
collects device data and reports the
data to the northbound NMS.

Monitor IP Set the IP address No  IP for WAN_1 is


for the monitoring 192.168.1.10 by default.
module.  The default IP addresses of
Primary DNS server and
Secondary DNS server in the
DNS Server Address area are
192.168.1.10.
 IP for WAN_2 is
192.168.0.10 by default.
Time Set the time zone, No NA
time, and date.
Access NA Set the access users No NA
Manage and permissions.
ment

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

Main Second- Third-Level Function Factor Remarks


Menu Level Menu y
Menu Defaul
ts
Restor
ationa
Video NA Add, modify, or Yes NA
Manage delete videos.
ment
NMS NetEco Set SNMP and Yes Server IP is 192.168.8.11 by
Applicati NetEco default.
on communications Port number is 31220 by
parameters. default.
Monitoring IP address for link
setup is WAN_1 by default.
SNMP Yes SNMP version is SNMPv3 by
default.
SNMP port number is 161 by
default.
Transparent Set the transparent Yes Transparent Transmission
Transmission transmission Through COM Ports is Disable
Channel function of the by default.
device and upload Enable security authentication
the network security is Enable by default.
certificate.
Device Device Addition Add devices or No NA
Manage replace the security
ment Security certificate for device No NA
Certification access.
Change
Smart NA Cascade up to three Yes NA
Module ECC800s through
Cascadin multi-module
g configuration.
PUE NA Set PUE parameters. Yes PUE Function is Enable by
Configur default.
ation PUE configuration mode is
Standard by default.
Linkage NA Set PLC linkage Yes NA
Control rules.
Alarm Basic Alarm Set basic alarm Yes NA
Paramete Parameters parameters and
rs alarm association
Alarm Linkage parameters. Yes NA

Performa Performance Query and set device Yes NA


nce Parameters performance

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

Main Second- Third-Level Function Factor Remarks


Menu Level Menu y
Menu Defaul
ts
Restor
ationa
Paramete parameters.
rs
All Configured View all the preset Yes NA
Data performance
parameters
Event Email Settings Set alarm Yes NA
Notificati notification mode to
on SMS Settings be over email and Yes NA
SMS.
Alarm Yes NA
Notification
Signal NA Modify signal Yes NA
Name names.
Modify
Maintena Software Software Upgrade the Yes NA
nce Upgrade Upgrade software of the
ECC800 and its
southbound devices
online.
Version If the version is not No NA
Mapping matched, you need
to perform matching
upgrade.
Version NA Query the version No NA
Informati information about
on hardware and
software.
E-Label NA Query or export No NA
E-labels.
User NA Manage users, such No NA
Manage as adding,
ment modifying, and
deleting users.
Configur NA Import and export No NA
ation File configuration files to
configure devices
quickly, and restore
factory defaults.
Fault NA Export fault No NA
Informati information.
on

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

Main Second- Third-Level Function Factor Remarks


Menu Level Menu y
Menu Defaul
ts
Restor
ationa
APP NA Download the app No NA
Obtainin installation package
g by scanning the QR
code.
Paramete NA  Synchronize No NA
r Sync device
parameters to
quickly import
data of
southbound
devices (such as
the
multi-functional
sensor and
skylight
actuator).
 Support device
replacement.
Access NA Manage the access No NA
Package package.
Mgmt
Configur NA Support the No NA
ation deployment wizard
Wizard and set simple
parameters as
instructed by the
wizard.
 a: The factory settings can be restored only on the WebUI.
 b: Multi-Module Monitoring is displayed on the Home page only after you set Smart Module Cascading.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

4.2 Mobile Phone App


Figure 4-2 Home screen

Table 4-2 Mobile phone app functions

Screen Function
Home Allows you to view the device layout diagram, energy, environment,
resource consumption, and alarms.
iPower Allows you to view the running status and alarm status of all branches
on the power supply and distribution links page, and has the
self-diagnosis function.
iCooling Allows you to view the cooling distribution in smart modules and
operating status of components on the cooling link diagram page.
More Monitor Allows you to view details about devices under the monitoring
system, power distribution, aisle, cooling, and cabinet types.
Asset Allows you to view device asset details such as electronic labels of
Details system devices and other devices.
iFind Allows you to modify the names and positions of devices in the device
layout diagram, and deliver a blinking command to a device under

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

Screen Function
iFind.
Operatio N/A
n Log
Access N/A
Event
Perform Allows you to view device performance data, such as the battery curve
ance and battery discharge curve.
Data
Softwar Allows you to upgrade the software using a USB flash drive or
e locally.
Upgrade
Export Allows you to export device configuration data, current configuration
Data files, and historical data.
Import Allows you to import a configuration file.
Data
Network N/A
Paramet
er
Paramet N/A
er Sync
Version Check the Software Version and Hardware Version of the device.
Info

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

4.3 Pad App


Figure 4-3 Home screen

Table 4-3 Mobile phone app functions

Screen Function
Home Allows you to view the 3D map of the power, temperature, and space
of the smart module, and view the summary information about the
resources, energy efficiency, environment, and alarms.
iPower Allows you to view the running status and alarm status of all branches
on the power supply and distribution links page, and has the
self-diagnosis function.
iCooling Allows you to view the cooling distribution in smart modules and
operating status of components on the cooling link diagram page.
More Monitor Allows you to view details about devices under the monitoring
system, power distribution, aisle, cooling, and cabinet types.
Asset Allows you to view device asset details such as electronic labels of
Details system devices and other devices.
iFind Allows you to modify the names and positions of devices in the device
layout diagram, and deliver a blinking command to a device under
iFind.
Operatio N/A
n Log
Access N/A
Event
Performa Allows you to view device performance data, such as the battery curve

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 4 UI Description

Screen Function
nce Data and battery discharge curve.
Software Allows you to upgrade the software using a USB flash drive or
Upgrade locally.
Export Allows you to export device configuration data, current configuration
Data files, and historical data.
Import Allows you to import a configuration file.
Data
Network N/A
Paramete
r
Paramete N/A
r Sync
Version Check the Software Version and Hardware Version of the device.
Info

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5 Power-On Commissioning

5.1 Preparations and WebUI Login


Prerequisites
 Computer operating system: Windows 7 and later versions
 It is recommended that the screen resolution be 1366 x 768 or higher.
 Browser: IE9 and later versions; Firefox and later versions; Chrome and later versions

Procedure
Step 1 Connect a network cable between the PC network port and the WAN_1 port (protected by a
security mechanism) on the ECC800.

Table 5-1 Default IP addresses for the WAN and LAN ports on the ECC800

Port Default IP Address


WAN_1 192.168.1.10
WAN_2 192.168.0.10
LAN_1 and LAN_2 192.168.248.10

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

 The WAN_1 port IP address cannot be set to an IP address in any of the following network
segments: 192.168.0.x, 192.168.248.x, and 192.168.245.x.
 When a WiFi module is connected, the IP address of the WAN_1 port cannot be set to
192.168.8.x.
 IP addresses for the WAN_1 and WAN_2 ports should not be set in the same network
segment.
 In some customized scenarios, the default IP address for the WAN_2 port is
192.168.248.10. The default value prevails.
 WAN ports support the Internet access and LAN ports support the intranet access. Connect
the PC network port to the WAN port or LAN port on the ECC800 based on the access
network.

Step 2 Configure the PC IP address and the WAN_1 IP address in the same network segment.
If the WAN_1 port IP address is 192.168.1.10, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, and default
gateway is 192.168.1.1, set the PC IP address to 192.168.1.11, subnet mask to 255.255.255.0,
and default gateway to 192.168.1.1.
Step 3 Set LAN parameters.

 If the ECC800 connects to a LAN and a proxy server has been selected, perform Step 3.3 and Step
3.4.
 If the ECC800 connects to the Internet, and the PC in a LAN accesses the Internet over a proxy
server, do not perform Step 3.3 and Step 3.4. Otherwise, you will fail to access the ECC800.
1. Open the Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options.
2. Click the Advanced tab and select Use TLS1.1 and Use TLS1.2.
3. (Optional) Click the Connections tab and select LAN settings.
4. (Optional) On Proxy server, clear Use a proxy server for your LAN.
5. Click OK.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-1 Setting internet options

Step 4 Set Internet Explorer parameters.


1. When you use Internet Explorer for access, set Internet Explorer to ensure the normal
display of and operations on the WebUI. Choose Tools > Compatibility View, and add
the web access address to the compatibility view.
2. Add the ECC800 IP address to the list of trusted sites.

Figure 5-2 Adding an address

3. Enable file download and set the security level of the trusted site to low.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-3 Setting parameters

When switching between different versions of the ECC800 on your PC, you are advised to clear the
historical Internet Explorer cache. Failing to do so may cause some information missed or exception
after login. The following provides the details:
1. Open Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options > General.
2. Select Delete browsing history on exit and click Delete.
3. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box, select all options except Password, and click Delete.

Step 5 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI.


1. Enter https://monitoring IP address (such as monitoring IP address
https://192.168.1.10) in the address box of the browser, and then press Enter to enter
the WebUI login page.

Figure 5-4 WebUI login page

2. On the login page, enter the preset user name admin and preset password Changeme,
set the language, and click Log In.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

 After the first login, change the password in time to ensure account security and prevent
unauthorized network attacks, such as data tampering. Huawei will not be liable for any security
issues caused by your failure to change the preset password in time or password loss after changing.
 Change the password of the user account periodically.
 Record and keep the password properly. If you forgot the password, you will be unable to log in to
the WebUI. When Event Notification is configured, password retrieval is supported.
 An account is logged out due to timeout if no operation is performed within 10 minutes after system
login.
 A maximum of three users can log in to the ECC800 WebUI at the same time.

----End

5.2 Commissioning Configuration Wizard


Context
 Only administrators are entitled to perform the configuration wizard.
 Currently, commissioning wizard is provided for the following functions: Smart
Module Settings, Basic Param Settings, Add Devices, Add Sensor, Plan View, Power
Dist Settings, Temp Control Settings, Linkage Test, Video Settings, and Access
Management.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.

The configuration wizard is displayed when you log in to the ECC800 WebUI for the first time or the
system type is switched.

Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Configuration Wizard to access the parameter configuring page for
the deployment wizard.
Step 3 Configure related parameters on the page as instructed. For details, see the function
description on the left of the page.

 In the process, click Previous, Next, and Skip as required.


 To exit before the configuration is complete, click Finish to terminate the configuration directly.

Step 4 After configuring the parameters, click Finish.


Step 5 After confirming that the commissioning Result is normal, enter the Checker Name and
Check Date, and click Configuration Completed.

To export the configuration result, click Export Check Result. The export file format is csv.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

5.3 Commissioning Event Notification


You can set alarm notification by email or SMS as required. Information about a maximum of
20 users who will receive alarm notification can be displayed.

Prerequisites
To implement alarm notification by SMS, the following conditions must be met:
 The ECC800 is configured with a 3G module and supports SIM card access in
2G/3G/4G mode. The 2G card should support the GSM mode, and the 3G/4G card
should support the WCDMA and GSM modes.
To implement alarm notification by email, the following conditions must be met:
 The ECC800 is connected to a network with an email server through a WAN port. Both
the Internet and local area network (LAN) are supported.

The ECC800 supports only SMS notification service but not data service by using the 3G module.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Event Notification.
Step 2 Set related outbox parameters.
1. Set related parameters in the Outbox Settings area on the Mailbox Settings page. If the
address type of the outbox is Domain name, choose System Settings > System
Parameters, and set related parameters in the DNS Server Address area on the
Monitor IP page.

The DNS server address is provided by the local network operator.


2. Click Test to check the email sending. If an email fails to be sent, check the outbox
settings and DNS Server Address. If the email is sent successfully, click Submit.

If Test email sending failed is displayed, check whether the receiver's email server requires
CA certificate verification. If it is required, download the CA certificate from the receiver's
email website and upload it in the Mailbox Certificate area.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-5 Email setting page

The following email addresses are for reference only (the actual parameters apply) and are used only for
configuring the email function.

Table 5-2 Main parameters on the sender's email configuration page

Email Email Mailbox Server Encryption Remarks


Type Server IP Address Mode and
Domain SMTP port
Name
Sina Mail smtp.sina.co How to obtain: Non-encryption:  The email
m 1. Click Start on 25 server must
the PC, enter comply with
163 Mail smtp.163.com Non-encryption: the standard
cmd in 25; SSL
Running area, SMTP
encryption: 465 protocol to
and click
Search to ensure that the
126 Mail smtp.126.com Non-encryption:
access the email sending
25; SSL
administrator and receiving
encryption: 465
page. functions are
QQ Mail smtp.QQ.com SSL encryption: normal.
2. Enter ping
email server 465  Enter the
domain name email client
Sohu Mail smtp.sohu.co Non-encryption: authorization
m at the position 25
of the blinking password at
139 Mail smtp.139.com cursor and Non-encryption: Password for
press Enter to 25 163 Mail, 126
obtain email Mail, and QQ
Hotmail smtp-mail.out server IP TLS encryption: Mail.
look.com addresses. 587
189 Mail smtp.189.com Non-encryption:
25

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Step 3 Add an email address to receive emails.

The email address is used only for configuring the email function and is not used for other purposes. The
address is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800 to ensure that the personal data of users is fully
protected.

Figure 5-6 Adding an email address to receive emails

The email address is used only for configuring the email function and is not used for other purposes. The
address is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800 to ensure that the personal data of users is fully
protected.

Step 4 Add a mobile number to receive event notifications.

The mobile phone number is used only for configuring the SMS function and is not used for other
purposes. The phone number is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800 to ensure that the personal
data of users is fully protected.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-7 Adding a mobile number

Click Test to check whether the added mobile phone number is available. If it is available, Successfully
to send the test short message. is displayed. If it is unavailable, Failed to send the test short message.
is displayed. Check whether the receiver's mobile phone parameters for receiving short messages are
correctly set.

Step 5 Set the alarm notification delay parameter and the new alarm notification parameter.

Figure 5-8 Setting the alarm notification parameters

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Figure 5-9 Adding alarm notification

Mailbox Address in Alarm Notification can be selected after it is added in Mailbox


Settings. Mobile Phone Number can be selected after it is added in SMS Settings.

Step 6 Click Confirm to access the re-authentication page. Enter Login password and click Submit.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
To modify or delete the email parameter settings, click Modify or Delete.

5.4 Commissioning the New Main Way


Context
In the new main way scenario, general input units and power distribution units communicate
with the ECC800 using the Modbus-MAC protocol. After the general input units and power
distribution units properly connect to the ECC800, the ECC800 automatically identifies the
units.
Then, you need to set parameters for the general input units and power distribution units;
otherwise, a false alarm may be generated.

Procedure
Step 1 Set parameters for general input units on the ECC800 WebUI.
1. Set parameters for general input unit 1.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-3 Power distribution settings for a general input unit

Path Parameter Defaul Setting


Name t Value
Monitoring > Power Rated system 50 Set based on actual
Distribution > General frequency conditions.
Input Unit > Running
Parameters > Power Rated system 380 Set based on actual
Distribution Settings voltage conditions.
Rated system 250 Set based on actual
current conditions.
NOTE
Set this parameter to a value
consistent with the information
on the nameplate of the general
input unit. For example, if the
model is NMW-0250 AC, set
Rated system current to 250
A.

System CT ratio 250 Set based on actual


conditions.
For example, if Rated
system current is 250 A, set
System CT ratio to 250.
Upper load 80 When the load current
current threshold exceeds the preset value, an
alarm is generated.
Lower load 60 When the load current
current threshold exceeds the preset value, an
alarm is generated.

2. Set the parameters for other general input units in the same way or by synchronizing
parameters.
Path: Maintenance > Parameter Sync
Step 2 Set parameters for power distribution units on the ECC800 WebUI.
1. (Optional) To modify the branch signal name of the power distribution unit, choose
System Settings > Signal Name Modify and access the Batch Signal Configuration to
modify the name, and then tap Submit.
2. The following is an example of how to display two branches for power distribution unit
1.
Choose Monitoring > Power Distribution > General Input Unit > Power
Distribution Unit > Display Configuration, select Branch Information Display
corresponding to QF1 and QF2, and then tap Submit.
3. Configure the power distribution settings for power distribution unit 1.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Table 5-4 Power distribution settings for a power distribution unit

Path Parameter Name Default Description


Value
Monitoring > QF1 Rated current (L1) 32 Rated current 32 A for
Power QF2 Rated current (L2) each branch.
Distribution >
General Input QF1 Branch circuit breaker in Enable When the parameter is
Unit1 > Power use (L1) set to Disable for a
Distribution QF2 Branch circuit breaker in branch, all alarms of the
Unit > Running use (L2) branch will not be
Parameters > reported.
Unhide All When the parameter is
Advanced set to Enable for a
Signals > branch, all alarms of the
Power branch will be reported.
Distribution
Settings Upper load current threshold 80 When the load current
exceeds the preset value,
an alarm is generated.
Lower load current threshold 60 When the load current
exceeds the preset value,
an alarm is generated.

4. Set the parameters for other power distribution units in the same way or by
synchronizing parameters.
Choose Maintenance > Parameter Sync.
----End

5.5 Commissioning the eLight


If an eLight is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the device address of the eLight actuator is the default value 2.
Toggle switches 1 to 4 of the DIP switch specify the device address in binary mode. ON
indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.

Table 5-5 Setting a device address

Address Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle


Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

Address Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle


Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4

4 OFF OFF ON OFF

Step 2 Check the eLight function.

Table 5-6 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Choose Maintenance > Configuration The eLight is lit up in red, green, blue, and
Wizard > Linkage Test > eLight white in sequence for 3seconds respectively,
Controller Commissioning and click Test. and then turns off.

Step 3 Set eLight parameters.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. In the Smart Module View, click Modify Device. Select an eLight actuator under
Devices, drag it to the access actuator to which you want to bind the eLight actuator, and
click Exit Edit Mode.

Figure 5-10 eLight actuator position

Table 5-7 Access authorization

Access authorization Description


Access authorization fails and the aisle door Red light, blinking for 3 seconds
cannot be opened
Access authorization succeeds and the door Green light, blinking for 3 seconds
can be opened

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 5 Power-On Commissioning

 The eLight actuator is automatically associated with the nearest access actuator in the smart module
view.
 If there are one access actuator and two eLight actuators in an aisle, the access actuator is
automatically associated with the two eLight actuators.

Step 4 If there are multiple eLights, repeat Step 1–Step 3.


----End

Follow-up Procedure
To modify the parameters of a single eLight, do as follows:
1. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > eLight Actuator Group > eLight Actuator. The
Running Parameters page is displayed.
2. Select the Associated alarm severity as required and click Submit.

Table 5-8 Function check

Item Alarm Severity Description


Selection

Associated alarm Critical If there is a critical alarm, the eLight


severity strip light turns on with a red light.

Critical, Major If there are multiple alarms, the eLight


strip light preferentially turns on with a
Critical, Major, Minor light corresponding to the high-severity
alarm. After the high-severity alarm is
Critical, Major,
cleared, the eLight strip light turns on
Minor, Warning
with a light corresponding to the
low-severity alarm.
NOTE
 Critical: red light

 Major: orange light


 Minor: yellow light
 Warning: white light

None The eLight strip light is steady blue


(atmosphere light).

NOTE
After you set the alarm severity, the eLight indicator is off if no alarm is generated.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

6 Feature Description

6.1 Access Management


6.1.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor
6.1.1.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI port
on the independent deployment AI_DI unit)
If a door status sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Context
 To use the AI/DI sensor, enable the corresponding AI/DI port and name the sensor. After
that, the specific alarm can be reported.
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 If multiple door status sensors are connected, commission one door status sensor first
and then commission the other door status sensors in the same way.

Procedure
Step 1 Set parameters for a door status sensor.

In this example, the door status sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the independent deployment
AI_DI 1.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration
page is displayed.
3. Set Device Type to Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit, set Device Name to
Independent Deployment AI_DI1 Unit, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Door1 and click
Submit.

Order number of door sensor name is same as cabinet.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

5. Choose Monitoring > System > Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit Group >
Independent Deployment AI_DI1 Unit > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port
Settings.
6. Set Door1 sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Set Door1 sensor type to Door sensor, ensure that Door1 power supply is Yes, and
click Submit.
8. Perform the preceding operations to set parameters for ports AI/DI_2 to AI/DI_8.
Step 2 Check the door status sensor functions.

Table 6-1 Commissioning the sensor

Check Method Normal Connection Status

Open the cabinet door. Door1 DI alarm is generated on the active alarm page
of the app or WebUI.

----End

6.1.1.2 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port


on the Rack Environment Unit)
If a door status sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Context
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 If multiple door status sensors are connected, commission one door status sensor first
and then commission the other door status sensors in the same way.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet1 > Cabinet Collector1 > Running
Parameters, set the door status sensor parameters.

Table 6-2 Parameter settings

Setting Object Method


area
AI/DI_1 Front door 1. Choose AI/DI_1 sensor to Enable, click Submit.
Port status 2. Set AI/DI_1 sensor type to Door sensor, click Submit.
Settings (AI/DI_1)
AI/DI_2 Rear door 1. Choose AI/DI_2 sensor to Enable, click Submit.
Port status 2. Set AI/DI_2 sensor type to Door sensor, click Submit.
Settings (AI/DI_2)

Step 2 Check the door status sensor functions.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Table 6-3 Commissioning the sensor

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Close and then open the door. If the alarm is enabled for the front and rear doors, a
cabinet door open alarm is displayed on the active
alarm screen of the app or the active alarm page of the
WebUI.

----End

6.1.2 Commissioning an Access Control Device and a Cabinet


Electronic Lock
If an access control device and cabinet electric lock are installed, perform the following steps
to configure it.

Prerequisites
 A maximum of eight access actuators are supported.
 When the fingerprint reader is connected to the ECC800 for the first time, the
permissions need to be synchronized.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the access user management and access permission management.
1. Choose System Settings > Access Management to access the access management page.
The system supports the management of various access permissions through the access
card, password, and fingerprint.
2. On the Authorization Operations tab page, click Add to access the new user page. On
the Basic Info tab page, enter User name and Employee ID.
Specify the following information on the Password tab.
− Password: Enter and confirm the password.
− Card number: The card number can be recorded directly or by swiping the card.
 Record directly: Type the access card number in the text box.
 Record by swiping the card: Click Swipe Card and place the card on the
access control device. The card number is automatically recorded.
− Fingerprint: On the Fingerprint tab page, select Fingerprint for Select fingerprint
reader and click Collect. On the Please collect fingerprint page, click OK. Then
put your finger on the fingerprint reader to collect the fingerprint after hearing the
voice prompt. After you hear a beep sound, move your finger away and collect the
fingerprint again.

 Each fingerprint should be recorded three times.


 A maximum of three fingerprints from different fingers can be recorded.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-1 Adding access users

On the Authorization Information and Term of Authorization tab pages, select access
users whose access permissions are to be set, and set Authorized Device, Authorization
Mode, Cabinet Lock, Start time, and End time.
− Access Actuator: Select the authorized access actuator for the user based on the
actual requirements. For example, select Access Actuator1 on the Access Actuator
tab.
− Authorization mode: Select Card, Fingerprint, Card and password, Card and
fingerprint, Fingerprint and password, or Card, password and fingerprint

 If the access actuator version is V139 or later, the access actuator supports the authentication mode
by card, password, or fingerprint.
To query the access actuator version, choose Maintenance > Version Information. View the
version in the Device Version list.
 If you set the authorization mode to Combination, for example, card, password and fingerprint,
you need to first swipe your card, enter the password, press the pound key (#), and then enter the
fingerprint. The door can be opened only after verification of all the three items is successful.
 If you set the authorization mode to Card, Password or Fingerprint, when you use the password to
enable the access control, enter the password in the format of user ID*password#. If you enter an
incorrect password or user ID, press * on the keyboard of the access controller to stop the
authentication process. Then, enter user ID*password#.
To query the user ID, log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator. Choose System Settings >
Access Management. In the Authorization area, view the user ID corresponding to the user name.
 The fingerprint information is used only for configuring the access control function and is not used
for other purposes. The fingerprint information is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800 to
ensure that the personal data of users is fully protected.
− Cabinet lock: Select a type on the Cabinet Lock tab page, for example, Smart
module > IT Cabinet1 > E–LOCK1.
− Permission validity period: Set Start date, Expiration date, and Allow door open
period.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-2 Adding access permissions

You can authorize and delete access users in batches.


3. Click OK to complete the task of adding access management settings.
4. On the Authorization Operations tab page, click Synchronize to Device, select the
modified access control devices, and click Start Synchronization.

Figure 6-3 Synchronizing access permissions

5. When Synchronization Status is Synchronized for the related devices, close the
Synchronize Access Permission page.
Step 2 Set an alarm for card readers.
Set Logical level configuration for reader removed based on the fingerprint reader
configured for the access control system.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 If the access control system uses a Card and password reader, choose Monitoring >
Aisle > Access Actuator Group > Access Actuator n on the ECC800 WebUI, click
Running Parameters, and set Logical level configuration for reader removed of the
corresponding card reader to High level alarm.

Table 6-4 Setting method

Cable Connection Scenario Setting Method


The card reader with a keypad is Set Logical level configuration for reader 1
connected to WG_1 port on the access removed to High level alarm. Logical level
actuator. configuration for reader 2 removed remains as
Low level alarm.
The card reader with a keypad is Set Logical level configuration for reader 2
connected to WG_2 port on the access removed to High level alarm. Logical level
actuator. configuration for reader 1 removed remains as
Low level alarm.

 If the access control system uses a Card, Card and fingerprint, or Card, password
and fingerprint reader, retain the default value Low level alarm for Logical level
configuration for reader removed.
Step 3 Check the functions of the access control device and access actuator.

Table 6-5 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Method 1: Attempt to open the door using For method 1: The aisle door is opened
the configured authentication mode. successfully.
Method 2: On the WebUI, choose For method 2: After you choose Query >
Monitoring > Aisle > Access Actuator Access Event on the WebUI, you can view
Group > Access Actuator n, and click the type of this access control event.
Controls to open the door remotely.

Step 4 Check the functions of the cabinet electric lock.

Table 6-6 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Method 1: Ensure that the cabinet door is For method 1: Swipe an authorized IC card,
closed, and attempt to open the door with an press the lower part of the cabinet electronic
IC card. lock when the green indicator blinks, and
Method 2: On the WebUI, choose open the cabinet electronic lock.
Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > For method 2: After the cabinet electrical
E-LOCK n, and click Controls to open the lock is remotely opened, press the lower
door remotely. part of the cabinet electronic lock after the
green indicator blinks, and open the cabinet
electronic lock. Choose Query > Access
Event on the WebUI, you can view the type

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Check Method Normal Connection Status


of this access control event.

----End

6.1.3 Commissioning the Exit Button, Skylight Button,


Atmosphere Light, Emergency Button, and Magnetic Lock
Procedure
Step 1 Check functions of the exit button.

Table 6-7 Function commissioning

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Attempt to open the door by pressing the The aisle door is opened successfully.
exit button when the aisle door is closed.

Step 2 Check functions of the skylight button.

Table 6-8 Function commissioning

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Attempt to open the door by pressing the The skylight can be opened manually.
skylight button when the aisle door is
closed.

Step 3 Check functions of the atmosphere light.

Table 6-9 Function commissioning

Check Method Normal Connection Status

Press the atmosphere light button. The atmosphere light is steady blue.

Step 4 Check functions of the emergency button.

Table 6-10 Function commissioning

Check Method Normal Connection Follow-up Procedure


Status
Attempt to open the door by The aisle door is You need to restore the
pressing the emergency button opened successfully. emergency button.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Check Method Normal Connection Follow-up Procedure


Status
when the aisle door is closed.

Step 5 Check functions of the magnetic lock.

Table 6-11 Function commissioning

Check Method Normal Connection Troubleshooting


Status
When the aisle door is There is no door open If a door open alarm is reported
normally closed, check alarm on the ECC800. when the door is closed,
whether there is a door open relocate the magnetic lock and
alarm on the ECC800. magnet to minimize the
deviation until the door open
alarm is cleared.

----End

6.1.4 Commissioning an Emergency Door Release Button


Procedure
Step 1 Check the function of an emergency door release button.

Table 6-12 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Follow-up Procedure


Status
When the room door is The room door is opened Remove the short-circuit
properly closed, properly. cable from the wiring
short-circuit the wiring terminals NC and COM or
terminals NC and COM or NO and COM on the
NO and COM on the emergency door release
emergency door release button.
button.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

6.2 Video Management


6.2.1 Preparing Documentation
Before commissioning a camera, prepare the following documents in addition to this
document.

Table 6-13 Documentation for Commissioning Preparation

Component Document
IPC6325-WD-VR IPC6325-WD-VR Configuration Guide
VCN500/VCN540 VCN500: VCN500 Product Documentation
VCN540: VCN510&VCN520&VCN540 Product
Documentation

6.2.2 Networking Scenarios


Smart ETH Gateway Networking Scenario
 There are multiple VCNs for multiple smart modules, you are advised to evenly
distribute the cameras to each VCN.
 A maximum of four cameras can be connected in the smart ETH gateway networking
scenario.

Figure 6-4 Camera + VCN connecting to the ETH gateway

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 To ensure the normal operating of the ECC800, avoid high data traffic, such as the
concurrent display of dynamic monitoring of cameras and VCN500 video playback.
 To ensure the normal operating of the ECC800, you can view the videos from a maximum
of two IPC6325-WD-VR cameras concurrently.

LAN Switch Networking Scenario


There are multiple VCNs for multiple smart modules, you are advised to evenly distribute the
cameras to each VCN.

Figure 6-5 Camera + VCN connecting to the LAN switch

6.2.3 Commissioning a Camera (Smart ETH Gateway Networking


Scenario)
6.2.3.1 Commissioning IPC6325 Cameras

Prerequisites
If multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera and disconnect
connections from other cameras. After commissioning the connected camera, commission
other cameras in the same way.
Ensure that the camera has connected to the smart ETH gateway and the smart ETH gateway
communicates properly with the ECC800.

Context
 Before commissioning the IPC6325 camera, set the IP address for the IPC6325 camera
based on customer requirements.
 Configure the camera/VCN internal IP address and the IP address of the LAN port on the
ECC800 in the same network segment.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 Configure the camera/VCN internal IP address and the IP address of the WAN_1 port on
the ECC800 in the same network.
 Set the internal and external IP addresses as planned by the customer. The following IP
addresses are just examples.

Table 6-14 IP address plan

Device Internal IP Address External IP Address


Camera Example: 192.168.248.50; range: Camera external IP
192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199 address
NOTE
The 192.168.246.X and the
192.168.8.X network
segment cannot be set.

VCN Example: 192.168.248.51; range: VCN external IP address


192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199 NOTE
The 192.168.246.X and the
192.168.8.X network
segment cannot be set.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the camera web page and enable ONVIF.
1. Remove the network cables connecting the smart ETH gateway to the LAN1 and LAN2
ports on the ECC800.
2. Use a network cable to connect the PC to POE port on the smart ETH gateway. Then, set
the local IP address of the PC to 192.168.0.11.
3. Remove the camera cover and press the reset button to restart the camera.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-6 Reset button

(1) Reset button

4. Enter https://192.168.0.120 in the address box of a browser, press Enter, enter the
default user name admin and preset password HuaWei123, and click Login. The
camera web page is displayed.
5. Choose Settings > Network > Platform Connection > Second Protocol Parameters,
and select Enable ONVIF.

Figure 6-7 ONVIF parameter

6. Remove the network cable from the PC, and reconnect the network cables between the
smart ETH gateway and the ECC800.
Step 2 Set the IP address for the IPC6325 camera.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

1. Enter https://192.168.248.10 in the address box of the browser and press Enter to access
the WebUI login page. After login, choose System Settings > Video Management and
click Search.

 The search timeout interval is 10s. If the search fails, a search failure message is displayed.
 To avoid missing cameras, perform Search for multiple times.

2. On the found camera record, click and set the external IP address for the camera
based on the external IP address allocated by the network administrator.
3. Click the link under Link (PC IP address and camera external IP address should be in the
same network segment) to access and log in to the camera WebUI. Enter the preset user
name admin and preset password HuaWei123, and click Login

Figure 6-8 Clicking the camera access link

4. Choose Settings > Basic Configuration > Network Parameters, set Way to obtain IP
to Use the following IP address and set an IP address to the planned IP address for the
camera. The IP address should be in the range of 192.168.248.50 to 192.168.248.199.
Step 3 On the ECC800 WebUI, click Add under Video Information. In the New Video
Information dialog box that is displayed, enter camera/VCN information.
 Name: Enter the camera/VCN name (for example, Camera1).
 External IP: Enter the external IP address of the camera (the actual IP address planned
by the customer prevails).
 Internal IP: Enter the internal IP address, that is, the IP address of the camera/VCN (for
example, 192.168.248.56).

Figure 6-9 Allocated internal IP address of the camera

 Video Type: Select the video type based on the customer's device.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 Link: Enter the external IP address of the camera (for example, https://external IP
address of the camera).
 Change IP camera ONVIF interface access password: If the preset password for
accessing the ONVIF interface of the IP camera is changed, enter the new password in
Password. Otherwise, the ECC cannot collect motion detection alarms from the IP
camera.

Figure 6-10 Adding video information

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-11 IP camera ONVIF interface access password

Step 4 Click Confirm after video information is entered.


Step 5 In the Video information list, click a link address under Link to go to the camera WebUI as
instructed.
Step 6 For details about how to commission IP cameras and set parameters for them, see the
documentation delivered with the equipment or obtain the documentation by referring to the
"Preparing Documentation" section.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through videos.
Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. (Optional) If you use the SD card when no VCN is configured, perform commissioning
by following the instructions in 6.2.3.2 Commissioning IPC6325 Camera (SD Card
Configured).
3. Set camera stream type, primary stream, and secondary stream 1 parameters.

Set coding protocol to H.265.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-12 Setting primary stream parameters

Figure 6-13 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

----End

6.2.3.2 Commissioning IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured)

Context
If the VCN is not configured and an SD card is chosen, perform the following procedure.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Huawei IPC WebUI.
Step 2 Format the SD card.
1. Choose Settings>System Configuration>Storage Management.
2. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.
Step 3 Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings>
Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.

Figure 6-14 Setting audio and video parameters

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the following table.

Table 6-15 Camera configuration parameters

Condition Result

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Coding Resolution Frame Rate I-frame Minimum Supported


Protocol Interval Required Video
Bit Rate Storage
Duration
(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1M 66
H.264 1080P 25 50 1M 66
H.265 720P 25 50 0.8M 75
H.264 720P 25 50 1M 66
H.265 720P 25 50 0.6M 105
H.264 720P 25 50 0.8M 75

Step 4 Select Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detection parameters, and
click Save.

Figure 6-15 Setting motion detection parameters

Step 5 Set the deployment policy.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-16 Setting the deployment policy

Step 6 Set the alarm linkage policy.

Figure 6-17 Setting the alarm linkage policy

----End

6.2.4 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch Networking


Scenario)
6.2.4.1 Commissioning IPC6325 Cameras

Prerequisites
If multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera and disconnect
connections from other cameras. After commissioning the connected camera, commission
other cameras in the same way.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network segment.
Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the address bar of the Internet
Explorer and press Enter button.

The following lists the operating system and browser supported for logging in to the camera through the
WebUI.
 Windows 7: Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11. Chrome 32+, and FireFox 35–51
 Windows 8: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 32+, and FireFox 35–51
 Windows 10: Internet Explorer 11, Chrome 32+, and FireFox 35–51
 Google Chrome 45 or later versions need to install the Internet Explorer tab plug-in.
 Only 32-bit web browsers are supported.
2. Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and click Log
In.
Step 2 For details about how to commission IP cameras and set parameters for them, see the
documentation delivered with the equipment or obtain the documentation by referring to the
"Preparing Documentation" section.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through videos.
Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. Choose Settings > Network Configuration > Network Parameters, and set IPv4
address, IPv4 Subnet mask, and IPv4 Gateway address for the camera according to
the site plan.
3. Choose Settings > Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings, and set IP address, Subnet
mask, and Gateway IP address for the camera according to the site plan.

Set coding protocol to H.265.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-18 Setting primary stream parameters

Figure 6-19 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Commission the other cameras by referring to this section.

6.2.4.2 Commissioning IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured)

Context
If the VCN is not configured and an SD card is chosen, perform the following procedure.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network segment.
Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in the address bar of the Internet
Explorer and press Enter.
2. Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and click Log
In.
Step 2 For details about how to commission cameras and set parameters for them, see the
documentation delivered with the equipment or obtain the documentation by referring to the
Preparing Documentation section.
1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through videos.
Adjust the lens if necessary.
2. Set IPv4 address, IPv4 subnet mask, and IPv4 gateway address to the planned values.

Figure 6-20 Basic camera configuration

3. Format the SD card.


a. Choose Settings> System Configuration > Storage Management.
b. The Storage Management page is displayed, format the SD card.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

4. Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings >
Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.

Figure 6-21 Setting audio and video parameters

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the following table.

Table 6-16 Camera configuration parameters

Condition Result

Coding Resolution Frame rate I-frame Minimum Supported


protocol interval required video
bit rate storage
duration
(h)
H.265 1080P 25 50 1M 66
H.264 1080P 25 50 1M 66
H.265 720P 25 50 0.8M 75
H.264 720P 25 50 1M 66
H.265 720P 25 50 0.6M 105
H.264 720P 25 50 0.8M 75

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

5. Select Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detection parameters,
and click Save.

Figure 6-22 Setting motion detection parameters

6. Set the deployment policy.

Figure 6-23 Setting the deployment policy

7. Set the alarm linkage policy.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-24 Setting the alarm linkage policy

----End

6.2.5 Setting Parameters on the VCN WebUI


Prerequisites
For details about the VCN hardware description and installation, see the "Hardware Guide" in
the corresponding VCN product documentation. For details about the VCN configuration, see
Configuration Guide.

The version number is subject to the Quick Start delivered with the VCN. The description and link in
this document are for reference only.

Context
A default IP address has been configured for the VCN before delivery. Modify the IP address
based on the actual network plan.

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the IP address for the VCN.
1. Configure the PC IP address and the VCN IP address in the same network segment.
Enter the OMU Portal address (the default address for VCN is
https://192.168.1.100:8443; the default address for VCN540 is
https://192.168.2.101:8443) in the address bar of the Internet Explorer and press the
Enter button.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

The OMU Portal supports Internet Explorer 8.0 and later versions.
2. On the login page, enter the user name Admin and preset password Change_Me, and
click Log In to enter the OMU Portal page.

After the first login, change the password in time to ensure account security and prevent unauthorized
network attacks, such as data tampering. Huawei will not be liable for any security issues caused by your
failure to change the preset password in time or password loss after changing.
3. Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration. Set the service IP address
(internal IP address of the VCN), NAT IP address (external IP address of the VCN), time
zone, and time according to the site requirements.

Figure 6-25 Configuring the server

 Set Business IP to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, Subnet mask to 255.255.254.0, Gateway IP to


XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The values here are examples. The actual values prevail.
 Set NAT IP to VCN external IP address, which is the same as the external IP address mapped from
the VCN internal IP address displayed on the ECC800.
4. Configure the NTP synchronization. After setting The NTP clock source server to Yes,
set the IP address of the NTP server.

The server that connects to cameras needs to enable the camera NTP synchronization function. For the
detailed operations, see Step 2.

Step 2 Enabling camera NTP synchronization.


The camera NTP synchronization function for the server is disabled by default. The camera
NTP synchronization function needs to be enabled for the server that connects to cameras.
After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, cameras will automatically
time-synchronize from their access servers.
1. Log in to the OMU portal of the VCN as the Admin user.
2. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration.
3. Select the server that the camera needs to access, set Module name to SCU and
Parameter type to System property, and click Search.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-26 Configuring Camera NTP Synchronization

4. In the search results, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NTPIPC and set
Value to 1.
5. Click Save. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, the camera, after
being connected to the server, will automatically time-synchronize with the server.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
 The VCN automatically restarts after the IP address is modified. The restart takes about 5
minutes. After the restart, use the new IP address to access the VCN.
 Change the PC IP address to an address in the network segment of the new VCN IP
address, enter the VCN IP address in the address box of the Internet browser, and log in
to the OMU Portal system.
 (Optional) Deploying IVS in Stack Mode. For details, log in to the
https://e.huawei.com/, search for the VCN product documentation, open the
documentation, and see the section (Optional) Deploying IVS in Stack Mode.
 (Optional) Deploying MPUs in Cluster Mode. For details, log in to the
https://e.huawei.com/, search for the VCN product documentation, open the
documentation, and see the section (Optional) Deploying MPUs in Cluster Mode.

For the VCN500, search for VCN500 Product Documentation. For the VCN540, search for
VCN510&VCN520&VCN540 Product Documentation.

6.2.6 Setting Parameters on the VCN IVS Client


Prerequisites
The network communication between the VCN and the camera is normal.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the VCN IVS client.
1. Download the VCN IVS client.
You can obtain the VCN IVS in either of the following ways:
Method 1 Obtain the HW_IVS_Client.exe file from the software CD-ROM delivered
with the VCN.
Method 2 1. Log in to the VCN OMU Portal, choose Local Configuration > Basic
Configuration, and view Current version.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

2. Log in to https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, and search for Client


Package.zip followed by the VCN model (Client Package.zip VCN540
for example). In the search result, click the Software Download tab, click
the version and patch number corresponding to the current version, and
download the Client Package.zip software package.

Figure 6-27 Client Package search result

2. Double-click HW_IVS_Client.exe, adopt the default installation mode, and wait until
the installation is complete.
3. Double-click the client program and on the login page, enter the user name Admin and
preset password Change_Me, and set Server address to the actual service IP address
(VCN IP address) and Port to 9900.

If the VCN IVS and VCN are deployed in the same LAN, set Server IP address to the VCN internal IP
address (192.168.248.55, for example). If the VCN IVS is on an extranet and the VCN is on a LAN, set
Server IP address to the VCN external IP address.

If the VCN software version is V100R003 or later, the default user name is admin.
If the VCN software version is V100R002 or earlier, the default user name is Admin.
4. Click Log In to access the client home page.

After the first login, change the password in time to ensure account security and prevent unauthorized
network attacks, such as data tampering. Huawei will not be liable for any security issues caused by your
failure to change the preset password in time or password loss after changing.

Step 2 Add a camera. For details, see the documentation delivered with the equipment or obtain the
documentation by referring to the "Preparing Documentation" section. View the
corresponding section.

The IPC6325 camera is driven by the HWSDK protocol.


1. In the Quick Setup area on the VCN IVS home page, double-click Add Camera.
2. Click + in the lower left corner on the Search criteria page, setting the parameters
according to the following table, and click Next.

Table 6-17 Setting search criteria

Item Value

Start IP Address and End IP Address IP address range


Drive HWSDK
Access domain Select the domain that cameras need to

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Item Value
access
Mount Server Select the server that cameras need to access

There are multiple VCNs for multiple smart modules, you are advised to evenly distribute the cameras to
each VCN.
3. Click Search, in each camera record, enter the user name and password in the text boxes
and click Verify. If the camera is verified successfully, select cameras to add and click
Next.
4. Preview live video images, click the camera in the camera list on the left, and adjust
camera parameters to optimize the image effect. Then click Next.
5. (Optional) Group the cameras and click Next after grouping.
6. Click Finish to finish adding a camera.
Step 3 Configuring a Video Recording Plan.
1. In the Quick Setup area on the VCN IVS home page, double-click Server Recording
Plan.
2. Select the camera on the Cameras list and click Next.
3. (Optional) Set recording parameters, and click Next.
4. Set recording plan parameters in the Time settings. Drag the timeline to select the time
segment for implementing video recording.

If you set the recording plan policy is to All, you do not need to set the recording plan time.
5. Click Next to complete the recording plan setting. When is displayed in the status bar,
the recording plan has been set successfully.
6. Click Finish.
Step 4 Create a user.
When connecting to the VCN on the NetEco, you need to log in to the VCN as a non-admin
user.
1. Log in to the VCN IVS as user Admin.

If the VCN software version is V100R003 or later, the default user name is admin.
If the VCN software version is V100R002 or earlier, the default user name is Admin.
2. On the VCN IVS home page, double-click Add User, create a user, and click Next. The
Assign Rights page is displayed.

When creating a user, you can select Enable account validity period and set Valid from and Valid to
to set the account validity period for the created user.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-28 Creating a user

3. Set Multi-point logins to a value greater than 2.


4. In the Assign Device View Rights area, select the cameras to be browsed and queried by
the user. Set other parameters based on the documentation delivered with the equipment
or the documentation obtained by referring to the Preparing Documentation section,
and click Finish.
----End

6.3 Linkage Control


Prerequisites
 You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800 as well as the user name and password
used for WebUI login.
 A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800 is prepared,
and the PC has connected to port WAN_1 on the ECC800.
 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Linkage Grouping

Table 6-18 Linkage grouping

Linkage Category Default Status Function


 Link smoke alarm on If a smoke alarm is raised, the smart
with skylight open module opens the skylights, access
 Open door/turn on control, and lights by default.
lights if smoke
alarm a
Link smoke alarm with off If this linkage status is set to on and a
smart cooling product smoke alarm is raised, the smart
off cooling products turn off automatically.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Linkage Category Default Status Function


Intelligent lighting a off If this linkage status is set to on, the
camera detects human motion, and an
infrared alarm is raised, the aisle lights
turn on automatically.
 Link fire control off If you set this linkage status to on and a
with skylight open fire occurs in the smart module, the
 Open door/turn on skylights open, lights turn on, and the
lights by fire access control opens automatically, or
linkage a the smart cooling products turn off
automatically.
 Link fire control
with air conditioner
off
Link high temperature off If this linkage status is set to on, the
with skylight open skylights open automatically when a
high temperature alarm is raised and all
smart cooling products fail to
communicate with the ECC800.
a: To link Open door/turn on lights if smoke alarm, Intelligent lighting, and Open
door/turn on lights by fire linkage, set Monitoring > Aisle > AC Actuator Group > AC
Actuator > Set light mode to Automatic on the WebUI.

6.3.1 Fire Control Linkage


Context
 The ECC800 can generate an alarm using the multi-functional sensor or smoke sensor in
the aisle. This alarm, however, cannot be used to trigger the customer's fire extinguishing
system.
 A passive dry contact alarm signal of the customer's fire extinguishing system can be
used to achieve the following purposes: (1) Open the skylight using the ECC800 AI/DI
port, so that the fire extinguishing system in the customer's equipment room can quickly
function in the aisle. (2) Enable the aisle access control system and turn on the lighting to
facilitate escape. (3) Shut down the smart cooling product and prevent the smart cooling
product from supplying air to increase the fire.

An active dry contact signal of the customer's fire extinguishing system cannot be connected to the
ECC800 AI/DI port.
 The default status of fire control linkage is off. Set it based on the actual situation.
 Shutting down the smart cooling product by fire linkage is used as an example. Refer to
this section for details about opening the skylight, unlocking the aisle access control, and
turning on the lighting system by fire linkage.
 In this example, the fire controller connects to port AI/DI_6. The actual port prevails.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Procedure
Step 1 Install cables between the fire controller and ECC800.

Figure 6-29 Installing cables between the fire controller and ECC800

Step 2 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.


Step 3 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.
Step 4 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.
Step 5 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link fire control with air conditioner off to on.

Select Link fire control with air conditioner off under Linkage Group. If its value is on, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is off, the
corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 6 Modify the AI/DI_6 signal name.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration
page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_6 to Fire and click
Submit.
Step 7 Enable the AI/DI device.
1. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_6 Port
Settings.
2. Set Fire sensor to Enable. Click Submit to access the AI/DI_6 setting page.
3. Select Fire sensor type and set it to Normal Open or Normal Close as required.

After the corresponding AI/DI device is enabled, the AI/DI device type must be consistent with the DO
state.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Table 6-19 Fire sensor NO and NC definitions

Item Definition
NO Dry contact signal for the fire sensor
abnormality alarm. Closed: alarm; open:
normal
NC Dry contact signal for the fire sensor
abnormality alarm. Closed: normal; open:
alarm

4. Click Submit.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
After the alarm has been cleared when fire control linkage or smoke alarm linkage occurs,
perform the following operations:
 Close the skylights manually.
 Start the smart cooling products manually.
 After turning off the lights, set Set light mode of the AC actuator to Automatic. WebUI
path: Monitoring > Aisle > AC Actuator Group > AC Actuator > Running
Parameters.

6.3.2 High Temperature Linkage


Context
 The ECC800 implements high temperature linkage. If it detects high temperature alarms
by interacting with multi-functional sensors and all smart cooling products fail to
communicate with the ECC800, the ECC800 opens skylights based on the alarm status to
facilitate heat dissipation.
 The default status of high temperature linkage is off. Set it based on the actual situation.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.
Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.
Step 4 Ensure that Link high temperature with skylight open is in on state on the Linkage Group
tab page. If it is in off state, set it to on.

Click Link high temperature with skylight open on the Linkage Group tab page. If it is in on state,
the corresponding logic configurations on the Linkage Logic List tab page are available. If it is in off
state, the corresponding logic configurations on the Linkage Logic List tab page are unavailable.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Follow-up Procedure
After the alarm has been cleared when high temperature linkage occurs, perform the
following operations:
 Close the skylights manually.
 Start the smart cooling products manually.

6.3.3 (Optional) Commissioning an Intelligent Aisle Light


If the camera web version is earlier than IPC V200R003C00, commission the camera by
referring to this topic.

Prerequisites
The upstream power input circuit breaker of the AC actuator is turned on.

Context
After the intelligent aisle lighting is set successfully, perform the following steps:
 After the door is opened using the access control system, the lighting is turned on.
 In the smart module aisle, the lighting is turned on when a camera and a multi-functional
sensor detect that someone enters.
 The lighting is turned off when the camera and the multi-functional sensor fail to detect
any person in the aisle within 10 minutes.

When using the intelligent lighting function, pay attention to the following:
 If a foreign object is hung on the skylight ceiling of the smart module and when the foreign object
moves, the camera may mistakenly generate a motion detection alarm to change the lighting status.
 When the human body moves, the camera generates a motion detection alarm and the lighting is
turned on. If the motion amplitude of the human body is small, the camera cannot generate the
motion detection alarm. If the lighting is turned off due to this reason, wave to the camera and the
lighting is turned on again.
 If light greatly changes outside the smart module, the camera may mistakenly generate a motion
detection alarm and the lighting is mistakenly turned on.
 If you manually turn off the lighting when you leave the smart module, the lighting may be turned
on again when the camera detects that the person leaves.
 The effective detection distance of the multi-functional sensor is 2.5 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.
Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.
Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Intelligent lighting to on.
Step 5 Check and configure the wireless networking (802.15.4) function of the AC actuator.
Before networking, ensure that both the ECC800 and AC actuator have no network
parameters. That is, the RF_Z indicators on the ECC800 and AC actuator are both steady
green.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 If the RF_Z indicator on the ECC800 is not steady green, hold down the SW button on
the ECC800 for more than 6 seconds to make the ECC800 enter non-networking status.
 If the RF_Z indicator on the AC actuator is not steady green, hold down the BLINK
button on the AC actuator for more than 10 seconds to make the AC actuator enter
non-networking status.
1. Hold down the SW button on the ECC800 main control module for 2 seconds (1.2–5
seconds allowed). The RF_Z indicator on the ECC800 main control modules turns from
steady green to blinking green at super short intervals (blinking at 10 Hz, on for 0.05
seconds and then off for 0.05 seconds). The ECC800 enters the wireless networking
(802.15.4) pairing status.
2. Hold down the BLINK button on the AC actuator for 2 seconds (1–5 seconds allowed).
The RF_Z indicator on the AC actuator turns from steady green to blinking green
intermittently at super short intervals (blinking at super short intervals for 0.5 second and
then off for 0.5 second). The component enters the wireless network search status.
3. After the wireless networking (802.15.4) pairing succeeds, the RF_Z indicator on the AC
actuator starts to blink at long intervals.
4. After all AC actuators are networked, hold down the SW button on the ECC800 main
control module for 2 seconds (1.2–5 seconds allowed). The RF_Z indicator on the
ECC800 main control modules turns from blinking green at super short intervals to
blinking green at long intervals (blinking at 0.5 Hz, on for 1 second and then off for 1
second). The ECC800 exits the wireless networking (802.15.4) pairing status.

If two or more ECC800 controllers need to be networked in wireless (802.15.4) mode, only one system
can be networked at one time. During the networking, ensure that the RF_Z indicators on the ECC800
main control modules of other systems are blinking at long intervals or steady on.

Step 6 Set running parameters for the AC actuator.

Table 6-20 Setting AC actuator parameters

Path Operation
Monitoring > Aisle > AC Actuator Set Route 1 Control Mode to Light, and
Group > AC Actuator > Running click Submit.
Parameters
Set Route 2 Control Mode to PAD
Charging, and click Submit.
NOTE
If two AC actuators are configured, you only
need to set the Route 2 Control Mode for one
AC actuator.

Step 7 Check the functions of the AC actuator.

Table 6-21 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Path: Monitoring > Aisle > AC Actuator Group > AC The light is on.
Actuator
1. Choose Running Parameters, and set Set light

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Check Method Normal Connection Status


mode is Manual.
2. Choose Controls, select Light control, select ON,
and click Submit.
When the light is normal, set Set light mode to Automatic. Path: Monitoring > Aisle >
AC Actuator Group > AC Actuator.

Step 8 Set camera parameters.

 If the camera is connected to the smart ETH gateway, you need to set camera parameters for
intelligent lighting linkage.
 The camera checks whether there are people motions in the aisle. If so, the AC actuator turns on the
lights.
 If the IP address of the camera that is automatically connected is the same as the IP address of the
camera that is manually added, the information about the camera that is manually added is
overwritten.
1. Select the actual camera type and go to the camera web page. For details, see the section
about camera commissioning.
2. Choose Settings > Network > Platform Connection > Second Protocol Parameters.
On the ONVIF and GENETEC tab pages, set platform interconnection parameters.

Figure 6-30 Setting platform connection parameters

Figure 6-31 Setting platform connection parameters GENETEC

3. Choose Settings > Intelligent > Common Intelligence > Motion Detection > Area
Parameters.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

4. Select Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detection parameters,
and click Save.

Figure 6-32 Setting motion detection parameters

5. If there are multiple cameras, repeat Step8.a - Step 8.3.


----End

6.4 PUE Configuration


The PUE configuration mode can be set to Standard and User-defined on the ECC800
WebUI. You can enable PUE functions and select a PUE configuration mode based on
requirements.

If the device electrical energy cannot be collected, disable the PUE function for the scenarios where the
PUE calculation condition is not met, for example, the smart cooling product is powered by the
wall-mounted PDB.

Feature Description
 Supports user-defined settings of the PUE and power consumption on the ECC800
WebUI.
 Synchronizes the PUE and power consumption calculated by the ECC800 from the
WebUI to the app, and displays the data on the app screen.
 The ECC800 connects to the NetEco over a northbound port and can upload the
calculated PUE and power consumption data to the NetEco.

PUE Calculation Formula

The PUE ranges from 1 to 3. If the PUE value is greater than or equal to 3, the value is displayed as 3.
When the PUE value is 1, it is invalid.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Table 6-22 PUE calculation formula

Configuration PUE Calculation Method


Mode

Standard PUE = Increment in total system input electrical energy/Increment in


total electrical energy of system IT load output
User-defined PUE = Increment in total active electrical energy of device
input/Increment in total energy consumption of IT load output

NOTE
When the configuration mode is set to Standard, the ECC800 can automatically calculate the PUE of
multiple devices connected in the N+1 and 2N scenarios.

6.4.1 Configuring PUE Standard Mode


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > PUE Configuration.
Step 3 Set PUE function to Enable.
Step 4 Set the PUE configuration mode to Standard, and click Submit.
Step 5 View the PUE. Choose Query > Performance Data and set Device to ECC800 from the
drop-down list box. For other searching criteria such as Performance data, Statistics mode,
Start time, and End time, select the item based on requirements and click Query. You can
also view the PUE in the dashboard or curve on the home page.
----End

Example of PUE Calculation


In this example, the PUE is calculated on the basis of the start time 17:00 and end time 18:00.
1. Choose Query > Performance Data.
2. Set Device to ECC800, Performance data to Total system input electrical energy,
and Statistics Mode to Hour, set other query criteria such as Start time and End Time
as required, and click Query. Record the increment in total system input electrical
energy of the ECC800. Increment in total system input electrical energy = 110.0 kWh –
100.0 kWh = 10.0 kWh.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-33 Querying the total system input electrical energy

3. Set Device to ECC800, Performance data to Total electrical energy of system IT


load output, and Statistics mode to Hour, set other query criteria such as Start time
and End time as required, and click Query. Record the increment in total electrical
energy of system IT load output of the ECC800. Increment in total electrical energy of
system IT load output = 56.0 kWh – 50.0 kWh = 6.0 kWh.

Figure 6-34 Querying the total electrical energy of system IT load output

4. Calculate the PUE of the smart module. PUE = Increment in total system input electrical
energy/Increment in total electrical energy of system IT load output = 10.0 kWh/6.0
kWh = 1.67.

6.4.2 Configuring PUE User-defined Mode


Context
This section describes how to configure PUE for the integrated PDC connected.
The functions of configuration buttons for the PUE user-defined mode are described as
follows.

Table 6-23 PUE configuration buttons

No. Button Description

1 Add Adds new total power consumption or IT power consumption parameters.


2 Delete Deletes a parameter setting for the total power consumption or IT power
consumption.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > PUE Configuration.
Step 3 Ensure that PUE function is set to Enable.
Step 4 Set PUE configuration mode to User-defined, and click Submit.
1. On the Total Power Consumption Configuration tab page, click Add to enter the
Total Power Consumption Configuration page. On the Select Device tab page, select
Integrated PDU 1. On the Select Indicators tab page, select Total active electricity
energy of PDU input, and click Confirm.

Figure 6-35 Total power consumption configuration

2. On the IT Cabinet Power Consumption Configuration tab page, click Add to enter
the IT Cabinet Power Consumption Configuration page. On the Select Device tab
page, select Integrated PDU1 and on the Select Indicators tab page, select 1QF4
electricity energy, 1QF5 electricity energy, and 1QF6 electricity energy, and click
Confirm.

Figure 6-36 IT cabinet power consumption configuration

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

3. Under Total Power Consumption Configuration and IT Cabinet Power


Consumption Configuration, click the edit icon on the right to modify the multiple for
calculating indicators, as shown in Figure 6-37.

Figure 6-37 Editing a multiple

 The multiple ranges from 0.01 to 4.99, with two significant digits. The default value is 1.00.
 The multiple is configured for slightly adjusting the calculated PUE, ensuring that the calculated
PUE is as close as possible to the actual PUE.

Step 5 Calculate the PUE of the smart module. PUE = (Increment in the total active electricity
energy of the device input)/(Increment in the total power consumption of the branch IT load
output)

Performance data source: The ECC800 obtains total electricity energy of branches from the power
distribution devices.

Step 6 You can also view the PUE in the dashboard or PUE Chart on the home page.
----End

6.4.3 Viewing PUE Data


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View to view real-time PUE data.

Figure 6-38 Viewing real-time PUE data

Step 3 Choose Query > Performance Data to view historical PUE data.
1. Choose Device, Performance data, Start time, End Time, and the display mode (table
or curve) of the PUE parameter as required.
2. Click Query.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 The 17:00:00 data includes the data from 17:00:00 to 18:00:00.


 If the query time is between 18:00:00 and 19:00:00 and the time has not arrived at 19:00:00 yet, then
the displayed time is 18:00:00 and the data includes the data from 18:00:00 to the query time.

Figure 6-39 Viewing historical PUE data

----End

6.5 Battery Management


If iBOXs and iBATs are configured, perform the following steps to commission them.

6.5.1 Setting iBOX and iBAT Parameters


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Power Distribution > iBOX/CIM > Running Parameters.
Step 3 Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, set iBOX single battery qty., Batt. installation time,
Single battery capacity, Current source, and Battery string No.. Retain default values for
other parameters.

Table 6-24 Setting iBOX parameters

Parameter Description Remarks


iBOX/CIM single Total number of batteries monitored by Set this parameter based
battery qty. the iBOX/CIM on the battery parameter
planned by the customer.
Batt installation Actual time at which batteries are N/A
time installed
Single battery Single battery capacity refers to the Obtain the battery capacity

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Parameter Description Remarks


capacity capacity of a single battery in a battery from the battery label or
string managed by the iBOX. document.
Current source 0–xxxA Hall N/A
The actual specifications of the Hall
effect sensor prevail.
Battery string No. Set this parameter based on the planned Set this parameter based
codes for iBOXs and battery strings. on the customer's plan.

----End

6.5.2 Networking iBOXs and iBATs in Wireless Mode


Prerequisites
Before networking, ensure that all the iBOXs and iBATs have no network parameters, that is,
the RF_Z indicator on the iBOX is steady green and the RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT is
steady red.

 The iBAT is connected to the iBOX in RF_Z networking mode.


 If the RF_Z indicator on the iBOX is not steady on (green), press and hold down the networking
switch on the iBOX for 10–20 seconds to clear the original network.
 If the RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT is not steady red, hold down the iBAT networking switch for
at least 5 seconds to clear the original network.

Context
 If multiple iBOXs are connected, commission the iBOX one by one in the same way.
Otherwise, networking may be in disorder.
 Indicator status:
− Blinking at long intervals: The indicator is on for 1 second and then off for 1 second
alternately.
− Blinking at super short intervals: The indicator is on for 0.05 seconds and then off
for 0.05 seconds alternately.
− Blinking at short intervals: The indicator is on for 0.125 seconds and then off for
0.125 seconds alternately.

Procedure
Step 1 Press the networking switch on the iBOX for 2 seconds. The ALM indicator blinks red once,
and the RF_Z indicator turns from steady green to blinking green at super short intervals,
which indicates that the iBOX is being networked.
Step 2 Press the iBAT networking switch for 2 seconds. When the RUN/ALM indicator turns from
steady red to blinking green at super short intervals (iBattery 2.0) or short intervals (iBattery
3.0), and finally to blinking green at long intervals, the iBAT connects to the iBOX network.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 It is recommended that iBATs be networked from the positive battery string terminal according to
the battery cable connection sequence.
 Batteries are numbered depending on the sequence of connecting iBATs to the iBOXs.

Step 3 Perform networking operations on the next iBAT only after networking for the previous iBAT
is successful. Repeat Step 2 to add other iBATs to the iBOX network.
Step 4 Press the iBOX networking switch for 2 seconds. When the RF_Z indicator on the iBOX
turns from blinking green at super short intervals to blinking green at long intervals, the
networking is complete.

After the networking is complete, if the ALM indicator on the iBOX is steady on, the number of devices
online is smaller than the value of iBAT Number. Check that iBAT Number is set to a correct value
and that the iBAT is successfully networked.

Step 5 (Optional) If multiple iBOXs are cascaded, repeat Step 1 to Step 4 to perform networking for
remaining iBOXs and iBATs.
----End

6.6 Asset Management


Asset management flowchart

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

6.6.1 Determining the Position of the Smart U Space Manager


If a smart U space manager is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
Connect the smart U space manager to the COM1 or COM2 port on the rack environment
unit.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 View the position of the smart U space manager.
1. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet > Smart U Space Manager.
2. Select Running Control and click Blink. In the actual environment, you will see that the
smart U space manager blinks to ensure that the device location in the view is consistent
with that in the smart module.

Figure 6-40 Viewing the position of the smart U space manager

----End

6.6.2 Querying the U Space Use Information


Prerequisites
 The ECC800 is connected to the NMS that supports asset management.
 The actual assets of the smart module have been allocated.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View to access the Plan View page, where you can create or modify
the views of the smart module. Drag the icon of a registered device or device in the cabinet
list to the planned position to generate the plan view.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Step 3 Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > Smart U Space Manager1, check U space
quantity, U Space Information and so on.
----End

6.7 Power Management


6.7.1 Configuring Power Management Parameters
Prerequisites
 Power distribution devices (such as the integrated UPS, integrated PDF and precision
PDC) are successfully connected to the ECC800.
 The smart module plan view has been created.

Context
IT cabinets, network cabinets, and smart cooling products support power management. The
ECC800 connected to an IT cabinet is used as an example in this section.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View > Modify Device and click Apply Power Distribution
Standard Configuration to use the default configuration to configure electricity for devices
in the smart module. The following scenarios support the function of applying default
electricity configuration:
 N+1 scenario: The system has only one power distribution cabinet and is working in
single-power supply mode.
 2N non-isolation scenario: The system has only one power distribution cabinet and is
working in dual-power supply mode.
 2N isolation scenario: The system has two power distribution cabinets and is working in
single-power supply mode.

For details about the power distribution solution, refer to the power distribution wiring diagram supplied
with the product.

Step 3 Double-click a network cabinet to access the Basic Configuration page.


Step 4 Check whether the branch information in Apply Power Distribution Standard
Configuration is consistent with the actual situation, and set electricity configuration
parameters such as Device Name, Cabinet height, Power system, Number of power
supplies, and Rated cabinet power as required.

The settings in the following table are used as examples to describe the basic configuration.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Table 6-25 Basic configuration

Parameter Setting Description


Device Name IT Cabinet 101 Set based on the actual device
name.
Cabinet height 42 U space quantity of the cabinet.
Cabinet width 600 The width of the cabinet.
Power Power Single-phase Set single-phase or three-phase
Distrib system based on the actual power supply.
ution
Param Numb 2 rPDU quantity.
eter er of
Setting power
s supplie
s
Rated 6.00 Set based on the actual rated
cabinet power of the cabinet.
power
rPDU-A01 PDU80001 > 1QF1(L1) Select a power distribution device
and power distribution branch for
the rPDU numbered rPDU-A01 in
the cabinet.
rPDU-B01 PDU80001 > 2QF1(L1) Select a power distribution device
and power distribution branch for
the rPDU numbered rPDU-B01 in
the cabinet.
Branch auto-fill  Ascending order  If the branch for the first
mode  Descending order cabinet is 1QF1(L1),
2QF1(L1), the branches for
subsequent cabinets are
1QF2(L2), 2QF2(L2), and the
like.
 If the branch for the first
cabinet is 1QF10(L1),
2QF10(L1), the branches for
subsequent cabinets are
1QF9(L3), 2QF9(L3), and the
like.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-41 Power configuration

 If Apply to all cabinets is selected, all other cabinets use this configuration.
 If Clear the power distribution configuration of all cabinets is selected, the power distribution
configuration of all cabinets will be cleared.

Step 5 Click Finish after checking that electricity has been configured for all IT cabinets, network
cabinets, and smart cooling products.
Step 6 Click Exit Edit Mode to exit the view editing page of the smart module.
Step 7 Choose Monitoring > Cabinet, and set Cabinet load factor overhigh alarm threshold
(default value: 90) on the Running Parameters page. For example, if you set the alarm
threshold for the cabinet load rate to 90%, an alarm is generated when the load rate of the
device in the smart module exceeds 90% of the rated power of the cabinet.

The alarm hysteresis is 5% by default. That is, if the cabinet load factor overhigh alarm threshold is 90%,
the raised alarm will be cleared when the load factor drops to a value smaller than 85%.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

6.7.2 Setting Fault Isolation Parameters


Context
 Battery trip: Once the function is enabled, the abnormal battery string trips if the battery
pole temperature detected by the iBAT exceeds the fire protection point. Then the battery
string fault information is displayed in the power supply and distribution link diagram.
 Smart rPDU high temperature disconnection: Whenever the ECC800 detects excessive
high temperature of an rPDU branch, it disconnects the entire rPDU to protect the IT
devices. Then the rPDU branch fault information is displayed in the power supply and
distribution link diagram.
 Smart rPDU overcurrent disconnection: Whenever the ECC800 detects overcurrent of an
rPDU branch, it disconnects the rPDU of this branch to protect the IT devices. Then the
rPDU branch fault information is displayed in the power supply and distribution link
diagram.

A non-intelligent rPDU does not have the fault isolation function.

Procedure
Step 1 Set parameters for BCB tripping upon battery abnormal.
1. Choose Monitoring > Power Distribution > iBOXn to access the Running
Parameters page.
2. Set BCB tripping upon battery abnormal to Enabled, and click Submit.
Step 2 Set the Smart rPDU auto disconnection parameters.
1. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > Running Parameters and click Smart Distribution
Information.
2. Set rPDU auto close enable to Enabled.
3. If the user has no special requirements, choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet >
rPDU > Running Parameters and retain the default value of Branch Auto Close
Current Parameter.
----End

6.7.3 Viewing the Power Usage


Prerequisites
Power distribution devices are connected to the ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 View the power information on the ECC800 WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as the administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet to access the Electricity Usage Information page.
3. View the power usage information about each cabinet, such as the Current Power (kW),
Power Consumption (kWh), and Load Percentage (%).

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

4. Choose Monitoring > System. In the Power Information area on the Running Info tab
page, you can view the power information about the smart module.
5. Choose Home > Plan View. In the PUE area, you can view the transient mPUE.

 Transient mPUE = Total input power/Total IT power of the smart module. For example, if a
PDU8000 with the total input power of 5 kW connects to the smart module, whose total IT power is
3.6 kW, the transient mPUE = 5 kW/3.6 kW = 1.39.
 If the power management is not configured, the PUE area in Plan View displays the average PUE.
 Instant is displayed for a transient mPUE.

Step 2 View the power information on the ECC800 app.


1. Connect the pad to the WiFi network of the ECC800 in the room.
2. Choose Home > Power to view the proportion of used power for each cabinet.
3. Choose Home > Resource > Power to view the real-time power and rated power for the
entire smart module as well as the real-time power for each cabinet, and check whether
the used power exceeds the alarm threshold.
----End

6.7.4 Viewing the Power Supply Links Diagram


Procedure
Step 1 Connect the pad to the WiFi network of the ECC800 in the room.
Step 2 Log in to the ECC800 app as the administrator.
Step 3 View the power supply status of the smart module and basic information about each device in
real time to quickly locate faults.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-42 Power supply links diagram

Table 6-26 Specifications of the power supply links diagram

Item Specifications
1 Two AC inputs for IT cabinets
2 Two AC inputs for smart cooling products
3 Tap to view the IT cabinets connected in real time.
4 IT cabinet (tap to view the cabinet name, current power, and status)
 Yellow: The cabinet has an alarm. Tap to view the alarm.
 Blue: The cabinet is running properly.
 Gray: The cabinet is not running.
5 rPDU (tap to view the basic information about the smart rPDU)
 Yellow: smart rPDU (Click to view the rPDU number, current, and status)
 Blue or green: non-smart rPDU
6 Branch switch
7 SPD switch

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Item Specifications
8 SPD
9 Main switch

----End

6.8 Cooling Capacity Management


6.8.1 (Optional) Setting Cooling Management Parameters
Prerequisites
 All smart cooling products communicate with the ECC800 properly.
 The electricity management configuration is complete, and the IT cabinet power
statistics are normal.
 The number of smart cooling products (number of started smart cooling products) with
the valid maximum cooling capacity received by the ECC800 is greater than or equal to
the Number of running air conditioners in this group in Teamwork settings of smart
cooling products.

Context
 Only for water cooled smart cooling product.
 After the smart cooling product is successfully connected to the ECC800, the cooling
capacity management function is enabled by default.
 The cooling capacity of the chilled water smart cooling products in the smart module can
be managed by collecting the running parameters of the chilled water smart cooling
products and using the smart module electricity management function.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters to access the Temperature and
Humidity Parameters page. Check whether Temperature and humidity control type is
Cold-aisle.
Step 3 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters to access the Running Parameters
page. Set Number of redundant smart cooling products and Local yearly highest
temperature as required and tap Submit.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-43 Setting running parameters

Step 4 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters. In the Cooling Capacity
Management area, set the parameters related to cooling capacity management for the water
cooled smart cooling product, such as the target cooling load factor and recommended supply
water temperature statistics cycle.

Figure 6-44 Setting cooling capacity management parameters

----End

6.8.2 Viewing Cooling Capacity Usage Information


Prerequisites
Smart cooling products have been connected to the ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the PAD to the WiFi network of the corresponding ECC800 in the room.
Step 2 Choose Home > Temp.. The view displays the temperature distribution map of each cabinet.
Step 3 Choose Home > Resource Consump > Cooling, view the real-time cooling capacity and
maximum cooling capacity of the smart module as well as the real-time cooling capacity of
each cabinet, and check whether the cooling capacity exceeds the alarm threshold.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

6.8.3 (Optional) Setting Cooling Management Parameters


Working Principle of the iCooling Function
The smart cooling product models that support iCooling linkage are air cooled smart cooling
products (NetCol5000-A025 and NetCol5000-A042).
The smart cooling product models that support iCooling linkage are water cooled smart
cooling products (NetCol5000CF_110 and NetCol5000CF_110HALF).
The function of iCooling linkage is to enable smart cooling products to quickly respond to
load changes and implement on-demand cooling. Multiple smart cooling products in a smart
module and the indoor and outdoor units of a smart cooling product can be regulated to
achieve optimal energy efficiency without hotspots.
 iCooling disabled
− For the cold aisle containment in the smart module, all IT cabinets use the cooling
capacity in the cold aisle and the temperatures inside the cold aisle are unevenly
distributed due to the uneven air flow.
− The cooling requirements of the IT cabinets can be met and partial hot spots can be
avoided only if the cooling capacity provided by the smart cooling product matches
the heat load of the corresponding IT cabinets.
 iCooling enabled
− The cold aisle is divided into multiple areas according to the smart cooling product
positions. The cooling capacity from any smart cooling product in the areas can
meet the temperature requirements of the IT cabinets because the temperature
unevenness is relatively low.
− The smart cooling products in each area quickly respond to load changes in the
areas and are regulated to achieve optimal energy efficiency.

Prerequisites for the iCooling Function


Before setting the iCooling function, the following requirements must be met:
 Determine the installation position for the cabinet temperature sensor in strict accordance
with the requirements in the installation guide.
 After installing the cabinet equipment, use filler panels to seal the vacant U space.
 The smart module plan view has been created. The positions of devices in the smart
module plan view must be the same as their actual locations.
 All smart cooling products in the smart module need to be networked for teamwork. For
details about how to configure teamwork networking, see the smart cooling product user
manual of the corresponding model. One smart module has only one group. In this group,
communication between the slave and master units as well as communication between
the master unit and the ECC800 is normal.
 The WebUI displays the Enable iCooling page only for smart cooling products that
support the iCooling function.
 The scenario is dual-row cold aisle containment and the following conditions are met:
− Smart cooling product should be placed face to face.
− The smart module is configured with an integrated UPS or integrated PDF.
Electricity has been configured for IT cabinets, network cabinets, and smart cooling
products. The ECC800 collects statistics on IT branch power information, which is
mapped to IT cabinets and network cabinets.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

− Rack environment units and cabinet-level temperature sensors are installed for IT
cabinets or network cabinets. The ECC800 can monitor the temperature of each
cabinet.
− At least one cold-aisle temperature and humidity sensor is installed for each smart
cooling product, and each smart cooling product can detect the sensor readings.

WebUI Operations
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 If the iCooling function needs to be used, choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running
Parameters. On the iCooling parameter setting page, set Enable iCooling to Yes and click
Submit to finish the iCooling function setting.

Figure 6-45 Setting the iCooling function

Step 3 Set the iCooling temperature set point and humidity setpoint according to the actual
environment.
Step 4 (Only for air cooled smart cooling product) Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running
Parameters to access the Temperature and Humidity Parameters page. Check whether
Temperature and humidity control type is Cold-aisle.

Figure 6-46 Setting the temperature and humidity setpoints

 When iCooling is enabled, smart cooling products enter the iCooling teamwork control mode.
 The temperature and humidity refer to the values at the air intake vents of the IT cabinets.
 After iCooling linkage is enabled, if the preceding conditions are not met, the smart cooling product
automatically exits the iCooling teamwork mode and enters the standalone mode. To view Team
work status, choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000 > Running Info > Status Information.
 When iCooling is enabled, the T/H threshold can only be set on the ECC800 WebUI.
 When iCooling is disabled, smart cooling products enter the intelligent teamwork control mode
(teamwork control of smart cooling products).

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

6.8.4 Viewing the Cooling Links Diagram


To connect an air cooled smart cooling product(Netcol5000-A025 or Netcol5000-A042) to the
ECC800, you can view the coolinglinks diagram.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters to access the Running Parameters
page. Set Number of redundant smart cooling products and Local yearly highest
temperature as required and tap Submit.

Figure 6-47 Setting running parameters

Step 3 Use the pad to connect to the WiFi network of the ECC800 in the room.
Step 4 Log in to the ECC800 app as the administrator.
Step 5 View the cooling distribution information.

Figure 6-48 Cooling links diagram

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Table 6-27 Specifications of the cooling links diagram

Item Specifications
1 Color band (Determine whether the temperature of the cooling system is normal
based on the color band.)
2 Air outlet temperature of the smart cooling product
3 Air inlet temperature of the smart cooling product
4 Smart cooling product status
 Blue: The smart cooling product is running.
 Gray: The smart cooling product is not running.
5 Alarm status (The alarm icon is displayed based on the alarm severity of the
smart cooling product. You can tap the smart cooling product to view the alarm.)
6 Temperature and humidity inside the aisle

Step 6 Tap the corresponding smart cooling product to check the operating status and working mode
of each component in the smart cooling product.

Figure 6-49 Links for a single smart cooling product

Table 6-28 Specifications of the links for a single smart cooling product

Item Specifications

1 Smart cooling product appearance


2 Alarm (tap to view specific alarms)
3 Internal fan
4 Condensate pipe (yellow: high temperature)

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Item Specifications
5 Air inlet temperature of the smart cooling product
6 Refrigerant status
7 Air outlet temperature of the smart cooling product

----End

6.8.5 Setting the Temperature Map


If the temperature map function is configured, follow the instructions provided in this section
to commission it.

Prerequisites
1. Cables to the NTC and T/H sensors have been connected.

Figure 6-50 Wiring diagram for the temperature map function

(1) ECC800 (2) T/H sensor (3) NTC

 Sensors NTC1 to NTC6 are installed in the following positions of the cabinet respectively: upper
part of the front door, middle part of the front door, lower part of the front door, upper part of the
rear door, middle part of the rear door, and lower part of the rear door.
 A maximum of eight T/H sensors can be cascaded to each COM port.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Context
The BOM number of T/H sensors is 02311FQG or 02312PBL.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the T/H sensor device address.
Set the T/H sensor device address through the DIP switch on the T/H sensor.
Toggle switches 1–6 are used to set device addresses, toggle switch 7 is reserved, and toggle
switch 8 is used to switch the temperature unit.
Device addresses are set in binary coding format in the range of 1–63. The first bit is the least
significant bit, and the sixth bit is the most significant bit. ON indicates 1 and OFF indicates
0.

Figure 6-51 T/H sensor DIP switch

 In the smart module view on the ECC800 WebUI, cabinets are arranged from left to right and from
top to bottom according to T/H sensor addresses 1 to 8.
 The first group of T/H sensors (sensors 1 to 8) are connected to the COM1 port on the ECC800, the
second group to the COM2 port, the third group to the COM3 port, and the fourth group to the
COM4 port.
 Set the T/H sensor addresses onsite based on the layout in the smart module view.

Step 2 Add a T/H sensor.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a T/H sensor.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Table 6-29 Adding a T/H sensor

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device Select Sensor from the drop-down list box.
Settings > attribute
Device
Management Device Type Select T/H sensor from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
parameters for Communicatio Select COM3 from the drop-down list box.
adding devices ns Port NOTE
are displayed.
The setting example indicates that the T/H sensor is
connected to the COM3 port on the ECC800. If the T/H
sensor is connected to another port, enter the number of the
connected port.

Device In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


Address actual configuration, set the device address for the
T/H sensor based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the T/H sensor does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the T/H sensor and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the T/H
sensor and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the T/H sensor parameters.
Step 3 Check functions of the T/H sensor.

Table 6-30 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Check the running information Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
about the T/H sensor on the T/H Sensorn > Running Info, and check the current
WebUI. T/H and NTC information of the cabinet.
Set T/H sensor alarm thresholds. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
T/H Sensorn > Running Parameters, and set High
temperature alarm threshold, Low temperature
alarm threshold, High humidity alarm threshold,
and Low humidity alarm threshold as required.
NOTE
The default values of High temperature alarm threshold,
Low temperature alarm threshold, High humidity alarm
threshold, and Low humidity alarm threshold are 30.0°C,
5.0°C, 85.0% RH, and 15.0% RH, respectively.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

6.9 Remote Management


6.9.1 NetEco Management
6.9.1.1 Connecting the Communications Cable

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the communications cable to the WAN_1 port on the ECC800.

Figure 6-52 Connecting the communications cable

----End

6.9.1.2 Setting NetEco Parameters


When the smart module can be connected to the NetEco, perform the following steps to
configure parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Apply for a fixed IP address to the equipment room network administrator.
Step 2 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway on the ECC800 WebUI.

Table 6-31 IP parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting


Value

System IP 192.168.1.10 Set this parameter based on the IP address


Settings > assigned by the network administrator.
System
Parameters Subnet mask 255.255.255. Set this parameter based on the subnet mask
> Monitor 0 assigned by the network administrator.
IP >
Default 192.168.1.1 Set this parameter based on the default
WAN_1 gateway gateway address assigned by the network
administrator.

Step 3 Click Submit.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Step 4 Set NetEco communications parameters on the ECC800 WebUI.

Table 6-32 NetEco parameters

Path Parameter Default Setting


Value

System Server IP 192.168.8.1 IP address of the primary NetEco server


Settings > 1 NOTE
NMS The NetEco IP address and the ECC800 IP
Application > address must be configured in the same
NetEco > network to ensure normal connection
Communicati between the NetEco and the ECC800.
on
Parameters Port number 31220 31220
Network port WAN_1 WAN_1 or WAN_2
for link setup

Table 6-33 Setting the authentication password

Path Parameter Default Setting


Value

System Authenticatio Modifyme_ Set this parameter based on customer


Settings > n password 123 requirements.
NMS NOTE
Application > Requirements for setting passwords:
NetEco > Set
Authentication 'a~z','A~Z','0~9','~!@#^*_={}:,
Password ./?-`$'(8-32 characters that
include at least three of the
following types: lowercase
letters, uppercase letters,
digits, and special characters)

Confirm N/A N/A


authentication
password

Step 5 Click Submit.


----End

6.9.1.3 Creating an ECC800 on the NetEco

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser.
 You have created modules or container in Data Center Planning.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Context
For detailed operations, see iManager NetEco 6000 Device Installation and Commissioning
Guide of the corresponding version.

Procedure
1. Choose System > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning from the main
menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.

2. Click in the upper left area of the Data Center Planning window.
3. Click Access switch to the Add Device window. You can add an ECC800 device to the
specified modular in the Add Device window.

Figure 6-53 Adding an ECC800 device to the modular

Click OK, and you can view the task information, including Type, Device Name, Region, Progress,
Status, Start Time, End Time, and Information in the displayed Progress window.

6.9.1.4 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function

Context
 Using the transparent transmission function, the NMS can directly manage southbound
components that are not monitored by the ECC800.
 In this example, the COM2 port of the ECC800 is used for transparent transmission.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > NMS Application > Transparent Transmission Channel.
Step 3 Set COM2(Port:3212) to Enable and click Submit.

Mapping relationship: COM1 corresponds to port 3211, COM2 port 3212, COM3 port 3213, and COM4
port 3214.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

 If the port is set for the first time, you are prompted to set an authentication password.
On the Set Authentication Password tab page, set Authentication password and
Confirm authentication password and click Submit.

Enable security Authentication is set to Enable by default. If so, an authentication password must be
set. If Enable security Authentication is set to Disable, there is no need to set an authentication
password but this is risky.
 If the port has been used, you will be prompted that the transparent transmission function
cannot be enabled and you need to select an idle port.
Step 4 Log in to the NetEco WebUI as an administrator.
Step 5 Choose System > Configuration Management > Data Center Planning. The Data Center
Planning window is displayed.
Step 6 Select the management domain to add a device. The management domain can be a modular,
rack, or equipment room.
Step 7 (Optional) If the management domain is a rack, click the management domain and choose
Design under . The page for adding a device is displayed. Otherwise, skip this step.
Step 8 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Click the drop-down list box in
Type and select Sensor.
Step 9 In this example, a Polymer temperature and humidity (T/H) sensor is added in the equipment
room of the root node. Select the device to be added and drag its icon to the management
domain.
Step 10 Set management attributes.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-54 Page for setting management attributes

IP Address indicates the ECC800 login IP address. Port indicates the ECC800 COM2 port (3212).
Device Address indicates the Polymer T/H sensor address.

Step 11 Click to save the created device view. Choose System > Configuration > Transmission
Channel Management.
Step 12 Click Modify after selecting the IP address of the ECC800 connected to the NMS.
 If Connection mode is set to Compatible, click Confirm.

On the ECC800 WebUI, Enable Security Authentication is set to Disable.


 If Connection mode is set to Security protocol, enter the value of Confirm password
that has been set on the ECC800 WebUI, and click Confirm.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Figure 6-55 Page for managing transparent transmission channels

----End

6.9.2 Third-party NMS Management (over SNMP)


6.9.2.1 Connecting the Communications Cable

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the communications cable to the WAN_1 port on the ECC800.

Figure 6-56 Connecting the communications cable

----End

6.9.2.2 Setting SNMP Management Parameters

Prerequisites
Before setting SNMP parameters, obtain the information listed as follows from the NMS.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Table 6-34 Information obtained from the NMS

Item Default Description


Value

SNMP version SNMPv3 SNMP version and port number used by the ECC800
and NMS. The SNMP versions include SNMPv1,
SNMP port number 161 SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.
 Read community N/A If you use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, enter the read and
name write community names that comply with the NMS.
 Write community Otherwise, the ECC800 will not connect to the
name NMS. The read community name must be different
from the write community name.
 User name N/A To enhance the security, you need a user name and
 MD5/SHA password for authentication if you use SNMPv3.
password After the authentication succeeds, the ECC800 can
communicate with the NMS.
 DES/AES
password
Trap target address N/A IP address of the NMS server.
Trap port 162 Port defined by the user.

Context
 SNMPv3 parameters should be set before connecting the ECC800 to the NMS. These
parameters are required for setting up the ECC800 on the NMS.
 SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c are insecure. Therefore, SNMPv3 is recommended. This
section uses SNMPv3 as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Apply to the equipment room network administrator for a fixed IP address.
Step 2 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway on the ECC800 WebUI.

Table 6-35 IP parameters

Path Item Default Setting


Value

System IP 192.168.1.10 Set this parameter based on the IP address


Settings > assigned by the network administrator.
System
Parameters Subnet mask 255.255.255. Set this parameter based on the subnet mask
> Monitor 0 assigned by the network administrator.
IP >
Default 192.168.1.1 Set this parameter based on the default
WAN_1 gateway gateway address assigned by the network
administrator.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 6 Feature Description

Step 3 Set SNMP parameters.


1. Choose System Settings > NMS Application > SNMP.
2. Set SNMP Version to SNMPv3 and set SNMP port number to the required port
number or retain its default value 161.
3. Click Submit under SNMP.
4. Click Add in SNMPv3.
5. Set User name, set Authentication Protocol to SHA or MD5, set Privacy Protocol to
AES or DES, and specify MD5/SHA password, Confirm MD5/SHA password,
DES/AES password, and Confirm DES/AES password.

 Set User name, MD5/SHA password, and DES/AES password to any character strings that meet
the system requirements. Note that MD5/SHA password and DES/AES password must be set to
different values. Record the settings.
 MD5 and DES are insecure protocols. Therefore, you are advised to set Authentication Protocol to
SHA or set Privacy Protocol to AES.
6. Set Password validity period and Advance expiration notification (days).
7. After setting the parameters, click Confirm.
8. Click Add under SNMP Trap.
9. Set Trap Target Address and Trap Port, set SNMP Version to SNMPv3, and specify
SNMPv3 User Name. Set Trap target address to the IP address of the NMS server and
set Trap port to the port defined by the user.
10. After setting the parameters, click Confirm.
11. Click Export in the Mib File pane, export the Mib file, and send it to the development
engineers of the NMS.

For enterprise users: Log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise, download the software package of


the required version from Support > Software Download > Network Energy > Fusion Modular Data
Center > ECC800, and decompress the software package to obtain the MIB file.
For carrier users: Log in to http://support.huawei.com, download the software package of the required
version from Support > Software > Carrier Cloud & Data Center > Data Center Facility > Fusion
Modular Data Center > ECC800, and decompress the software package to obtain the MIB file.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

7 Maintenance

7.1 Routine Maintenance


Table 7-1 Routine maintenance for the PSU in the ECC800

Check Item Expected Result Troubleshooting


AC input Input voltage: 200–240 V If the input voltage is abnormal, check
AC/100–120 V AC the power grid and input cable
Frequency: 45-66 Hz connection.

Output Output voltage: 53.5 V DC If the output voltage is abnormal, check


voltage (tolerance ±5%) the load power and cable connection.
Indicator The green indicator is steady Check the output voltage and determine
on, and the red indicator is whether the PSU is faulty. If the PSU is
faulty. faulty, replace it.
Fan No abnormal noise is If abnormal noise is generated, clean the
generated. fan.
Operating  Ambient temperature: If the temperature or humidity is
environment –20°C to +50°C abnormal, check the smart cooling
 Humidity: 0-95% RH product status.
(non-condensing)
Cable The cable connection is Secure loose cables.
connection secure.
Cables are not damaged. Replace damaged cables.

Table 7-2 Routine maintenance for the main control module in the ECC800

Check Item Expected Result Troubleshooting


Indicator The green indicator is steady If the indicator is off or any abnormal
on or blinking. condition occurs, see common faults and
troubleshooting to rectify the fault.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

Check Item Expected Result Troubleshooting


Network port The green indicator is steady If the indicator status is abnormal, check
indicator on, and the yellow indicator the network cable connection.
is blinking.
Operating  Ambient temperature: If the humidity or temperature is
environment –20°C to +50°C abnormal, check the smart cooling
 Humidity: 0-95% RH product status.
(non-condensing)
Cable The cable connection is Secure loose cables.
connection secure.
Cables are not damaged. Replace damaged cables.

7.2 Common Faults and Troubleshooting


Table 7-3 Common faults and troubleshooting for PSUs

Symptom Possible Cause Measure


The PWR indicator (green) There is no AC input. Check whether the AC input
is off. is abnormal.
The PSU is faulty. Replace the PSU.
The ALM indicator (yellow) Over temperature protection  The ambient temperature
is steady on. is triggered. exceeds the upper
threshold, and the
cooling capacity of the
smart cooling product
needs to be increased.
 The air channel is
obstructed and needs to
be unblocked.
AC input overvoltage or Check the AC input.
undervoltage protection is
triggered.
The ALM indicator (yellow) Communication with the 1. Clean the connector in
is blinking. PSU is interrupted. the rear of the faulty
PSU.
Communication with the 2. If the fault persists,
main control module is replace the ECC800
interrupted. subrack.
The ALM indicator (red) is Output overvoltage If the PSU is locked out,
steady on. protection is triggered. disconnect the AC input
from the PSU, and then
power on the PSU again

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

Symptom Possible Cause Measure


after the indicator turns off.
If the fault persists, replace
the PSU.
There is no output due to a Replace the faulty PSU.
PSU fault.

Table 7-4 Common faults and troubleshooting for the main control module

Symptom Possible Cause Measure


The RUN indicator (green) There is no AC input. If the green indicators on
is off. PSUs are steady on, the
power input to the system is
normal. Otherwise, rectify
power grid faults.
The main control module is Reinstall the main control
faulty or not securely module. If the fault persists,
installed. replace the main control
module.
The RUN indicator (green) The main control module Register the main control
is blinking at 4 Hz. does not register with the module with the NetEco.
NetEco.
RJ45 power output The corresponding power Energize corresponding
indicators turn off (involved ports have no output. power ports over the WebUI
ports: AI/DI1-AI/DI6, or NMS.
COM1-COM4, and
DO1-DO2). The corresponding power Check whether the
ports are short-circuited. connected load is
short-circuited. If yes,
eliminate the short circuit.
The ALM indicator (red) is An alarm is generated. View active alarms on the
steady on. WebUI and clear them one
by one.

Table 7-5 Common faults and troubleshooting for the independent deployment AI_DI unit

Symptom Possible Cause Measure


The PWR indicator is off. The independent Check whether the board is
deployment AI_DI unit is faulty and whether the cable
faulty or the power to the connection between the
independent deployment ECC800 and independent
AI_DI unit is abnormal. deployment AI_DI unit is
normal.
The RUN indicator is off. The contact between the Check whether the

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

Symptom Possible Cause Measure


independent deployment independent deployment
AI_DI unit and the ECC800 AI_DI unit is faulty and
is abnormal, or the whether the cable
independent deployment connection between the
AI_DI unit is faulty. ECC800 and independent
deployment AI_DI unit is
normal.
The RUN indicator is Communication between the Check whether the cable
blinking at short intervals independent deployment connection between the
(on for 0.125s and then off AI_DI unit and the main ECC800 and independent
for 0.125s). control module is deployment AI_DI unit is
interrupted. normal, whether the
independent deployment
AI_DI unit is faulty, and
whether the independent
deployment AI_DI unit is
added on the ECC800
WebUI.
The ALM indicator is on. An alarm whose default Check and clear the alarm.
severity is critical or major
exists.

7.3 Component Replacement


1. After replacing components, log in to the WebUI and choose Maintenance >
Parameter Sync to access the parameter synchronization page.
2. Click Device type and select the component type from the drop-down list.
3. Select the failure device in Source Device, select the reserved device in Target Device,
and click Submit to synchronize the configuration parameters of the failure device to the
reserved device.
4. On the Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Controls tab page, select Delete device with
communication failure and click Submit, add the reserved device to the smart module
view.

7.3.1 Replacing an ECC800 Main Control Module


Prerequisites

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

 The ECC800 main control module is hot-swappable.


 Before disconnecting cables from the ECC800 main control module, label the cables based
on the corresponding ports.
 Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, Phillips screwdriver, labels, marker
 Materials: a new undamaged and undeformed ECC800 main control module of the
appropriate model

Procedure
Step 1 Use the Back Up Current Settings function to record the ECC800 configuration information
or manually record the information.
Path: Maintenance > Configuration File > Back Up Current Settings

If the main control module is damaged, you may fail to log in to the ECC800. In this case, you cannot
back up the settings.

Step 2 Label each cable and antenna based on the corresponding ports on the ECC800 main control
module.
Step 3 Remove cables, the WiFi module, and antennas from the ECC800 main control module.
Step 4 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ECC800 main control module and pull the handles on
both sides of the ECC800 main control module to remove the main control module.

Figure 7-1 Removing the ECC800 main control module

Step 5 (Optional) Remove the Micro SD card and SIM card from the corresponding slots on the side
of the ECC800 main control module.
Step 6 (Optional) Install the removed Micro SD and SIM card in the corresponding slot of the new
ECC800 main control module.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

Figure 7-2 Installing the Micro SD and SIM card

Step 7 Install the spare ECC800 main control module in the ECC800 subrack and tighten the screws
on both sides of the ECC800 main control module.
Step 8 Connect the communications cables, WiFi module, and antennas to the ECC800 main control
module.
Step 9 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File and import the backup configuration file, or set
parameters for the devices that connect to the ECC800 to ensure normal communication.
----End

7.3.2 Replacing a PSU


Prerequisites

Do not touch the terminals in the rear of a removed PSU to avoid electric shocks.
 Tool: insulation gloves
 Materials: a reserved undamaged and undeformed PSU of the appropriate model.

Context
The PSU is hot-swappable.

Procedure
Step 1 Push the locking latch in the upper right corner of the PSU panel leftwards.
Step 2 Pull out the handle of the PSU to remove the PSU from the subrack.
Step 3 Gently push the reserved PSU into the subrack along guide rails, and push the locking latch
rightwards to secure the handle.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

Figure 7-3 Replacing a PSU

----End

7.3.3 Replacing ECC800 Antennas


Prerequisites
 Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
 Materials: Spare ECC800 antennas of the same model are available and functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the 2.4G and 3G antenna cables connected to the ports on the ECC800, as shown in
Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Removing antennas

Step 2 Install the spare 2.4G antenna and 3G antenna in the original positions and connect them to
the ECC800.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

7.3.4 Replacing a SIM Card and Micro SD Card


Prerequisites
 Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves
 Materials: A spare SIM card and a micro SD card of the same model are available and
functional.

Procedure
Step 1 Record the position of the signal cable connected to the ECC800 main control module panel,
and then disconnect the signal cable.
Step 2 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ECC800 main control module.
Step 3 Pull the handles on both sides of the ECC800 main control module, and to remove the main
control module.

Figure 7-5 Removing the ECC800 main control module

Step 4 Remove the SIM card and micro SD card from the card slot.

Figure 7-6 Removing a SIM card and a micro SD card

Step 5 Install the spare SIM card and micro SD card into the card slot.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 7 Maintenance

Figure 7-7 Installing a SIM card and a micro SD card

Step 6 Install the ECC800 main control module in the card slot.
Step 7 Tighten the screws on both sides of the ECC800 main control module.
Step 8 Reconnect signal cables to the ECC800 main control module panel based on the recorded
information.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8 FAQ

8.1 WebUI Operations


8.1.1 Setting ECC800 Cascading
If multiple smart modules (≤ 3) are installed in the same room and the customer has not
deployed the NetEco, multiple ECC800s can be cascaded for management. To set the
cascading function, follow the procedure in this section.

Prerequisites
Cascaded ECC800s communicate with each other properly.

Context
A maximum of three ECC800s can be cascaded. After the IP addresses of other smart module
ECC800s in the room are added to an ECC800, their active alarms and PUE data can be
displayed and viewed.
You can click links on the cascading management page of the master ECC800 to display the
login pages of the other ECC800s. Then, you can log in to view the details.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Smart Module Cascading.
Step 3 Click Add. In the displayed New Smart Module Cascading dialog box, enter the IP
addresses of the ECC800s to be cascaded.
Step 4 Click Confirm.
Step 5 Choose Home > Multi-Module Monitoring. The information about the cascaded ECC800s
is displayed.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-1 ECC800 cascading page

Step 6 (Optional) Click the alarm bubble in the Active alarms area in a smart module to view the
corresponding active alarm information.
Step 7 (Optional) Click the pencil icon next to a smart module name, and the Edit Smart Module
Title dialog box is displayed. Change the smart module name and click Confirm.
Step 8 (Optional) Click Link in a smart module on the cascading page to access the corresponding
ECC800 login page.
Step 9 (Optional) Filter and query the details of each alarm by smart module, device, or alarm
severity in the Active alarms area.
----End

8.1.2 (Optional) Setting Device Performance Parameters


Context
 Setting device performance parameters will affect the storage of device performance
data.
 The device performance data threshold can be changed to determine whether to record
the intermediate status parameters of device performance data.
 If you need to change parameters such as Collecting Data, refer to the following
procedure.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Performance Parameters.
Step 2 Set device performance parameters on the Performance Parameters page. Select the device
to be set under Device Type and click Confirm. All performance parameters of the selected
device are displayed.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-2 Performance parameter setting page

Step 3 Set device performance parameters, select the performance parameters to be submitted in the
first column, set Collecting Data, and click Submit. After the parameters are successfully
submitted, is displayed in the setting result of the changed parameters, and the numbers
of parameters that are successfully changed and failed to be changed are displayed beside
Submit.
Step 4 Select the All Configured Data tab page to view the configured device performance
parameters.
----End

8.1.3 How Can I View Version Information?


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.

Step 2 Click in the upper right corner of the home page and view the ECC800 version
information.
Step 3 Choose Maintenance > Version Information and view the version information of ECC800
and connected device.
----End

8.1.4 How Do I Set the Date and Time?


Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Time.
Step 2 Set the time zone, date, and time or click Obtain Local Time, and click Submit.
Step 3 (Optional) If the NTP server is used for time synchronization, select NTP server sync, set
NTP primary server IP, NTP backup server IP, Port number, and Sync interval (min),
and click Submit.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.5 How to Check the System Type and Set the Smart Module
Name
Context
 System type: FusionModule500, FusionModule800, FusionModule1000A,
FusionModule1000B, FusionModule2000, FusionModule5000 and General can be
selected based on the actual project configuration.
 Site ID: Alarms of devices under monitoring in the site are sent to the specified mobile
phone numbers of maintenance engineers by SMS. After Smart module name is
changed, the new site ID will be displayed in the short message content (for example,
XXX device communication interruption) so that maintenance engineers will know the
site where the fault has occurred.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Site Configuration, and check whether
System Type is consistent with the type of the smart module.
(Optional) If the system type is inconsistent with the type of the smart module, perform the
following operations. The system type FusionModule2000 is used as an example.

 By default, the system type displayed on the web page is the system type selected last time. Change
the system type as required.
 If the system type is changed, the monitoring software will restart and you can log in to the WebUI
again after 3 minutes.
1. Select FusionModule2000 from the System type drop-down list box.
2. Click Submit in the System Type area.

Figure 8-3 Setting the system type

3. Go to the Re-authentication page, enter the login user name and password, and click
Submit.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Site Configuration, modify Smart
module name, and click Submit in the Site ID area.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.6 How to Manage WebUI Users?


Context
WebUI users are classified as Administrator and Operator. They have different operation
rights.
 Administrator: The user name is admin and password is Changeme by default. The
administrator has all rights, including the rights for user management, browsing and
modifying all parameters in the system, software upgrade, and data import and export.
 Operator: The user name is operator and password is Changeme by default. Operator
has no rights for user management, system setting, version upgrade, running parameters,
smart module plan view editing, and internal fault information exporting.

Procedure
Step 1 Change the login password.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as the administrator.
2. Choose Maintenance > User Management. The user management page is displayed.
3. Choose the user to be modified and click Modify. Reset the login password on the
displayed page.

Figure 8-4 Changing the login password

4. Modify Advance expiration notification (days) and Timeout Interval for the
password.
5. Select password retrieval modes.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-5 Modifying parameters

Step 2 Add a WebUI user.


1. Choose Maintenance > User Management. The user management page is displayed.
2. Click Add.
3. Specify User name, Password, Confirm password, Password validity period,
Advance expiration notification (days), and Timeout Interval, select appropriate
values from the Access right and Login source drop-down list boxes, and click
Confirm.

 On the user management page, you can modify, delete, lock, and unlock a user.
 The value of Advance expiration notification (days) must not be greater than the value of
Password validity period.
 You can choose the password retrieval mode as required, either by email or SMS or by both.
 The WebUI supports a maximum of 16 users and a maximum of 3 concurrent online users.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If you forgot the password, perform the following steps:
1. Click Forgot password.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-6 Clicking Forgot password

2. Specify the user name. Enter the verification code.

Figure 8-7 Retrieving a password

3. Click Next to retrieve the password.

8.1.7 How Do I Create a Smart Module Plan View?


Prerequisites
To create a smart module plan view, it is recommended that you obtain or draw the planned
layout of the smart modular data center before the creation.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Home > Plan View and click Create smart module in Smart Module View. The
Modify Basic Config dialog box is displayed. Set the layout and device quantity in Layout
and Half-size cabinet qty./row based on the actual smart module scenario.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-8 Modifying basic configurations

 If Room monitoring is set to No, draw a smart module view.


 If Room monitoring is set to Yes, draw an equipment room view and smart module
view.
Step 2 Click Modify Device and create a smart module plan view.
 Drag the icons of registered devices (for example, the access actuator) and devices on the
cabinet list to appropriate positions in the layout, click a device icon, modify the value of
Device Name in the displayed Basic Configuration dialog box, and click Exit Edit
Mode to create a smart module plan view.
 Click One-Click Layout. The power distribution devices, IT cabinets, and smart cooling
products on the cabinet list are automatically arranged in the view. The icons of other
registered devices (for example, the access actuator) and devices on the cabinet list need
to be manually arranged.

If the locations of devices automatically deployed are inconsistent with their actual locations, you can
manually adjust them.

There may be multiple same device icons on the editing page. If you are unable to determine the
positions of wireless communications devices such as the access actuator, general input unit, and power
distribution unit, use the following methods to identify them:
 Hold down the BLINK button on a device for less than 1s to report the blinking status to the
ECC800. The corresponding device icon in the WebUI plan view blinks.
 Drag a device in the WebUI plan view. The RUN indicator on the corresponding device blinks
intermittently at super short intervals.
If both room-level and smart module access actuators exist, modify the value of Device Name to
distinguish them.
The value of Device Name for the power distribution unit should be consistent with its label, for
example, NMW A 01.

Step 3 Hold down the BLINK button on a device such as a smart ETH gateway for less than 1s to
report the blinking status to the ECC800. The corresponding device icon in the WebUI plan
view blinks. Check that the device positions and types in the plan view are consistent with the
actual situation by delivering the blinking command.

 If a room-level access control device and camera exist, drag them to the equipment room view.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

 You can click the camera icon in the view to display the camera web page.

Figure 8-9 Example plan view without room monitoring

Figure 8-10 Example plan view with room monitoring

----End

Follow-up Procedure
To modify the smart module plan view, perform the following steps:
1. Choose Home > Plan View.
2. Click Modify Device in Smart Module View. The Devices is displayed.
3. Drag registered devices (for example, the camera) to the appropriate positions in the
layout diagram and click Exit Edit Mode. The smart module plan view is updated.
4. When editing the smart module view, click Zoom In or Restore to adjust the
size of the view.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.8 How Do I Set and Add Devices?


8.1.8.1 How to Set and Add an Integrated UPS Parameters?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on the integrated
UPS, and the other end has been connected to the POE port on the smart ETH gateway.

Procedure
Step 1 Start the integrated UPS, and tap System Info on the LCD.
Step 2 Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password 000001, and then

tap . In the displayed dialog box for confirming the password, tap OK.

If you enter incorrect passwords for three consecutive times, you will be locked out for 5 minutes.

Step 3 Choose Settings > Communication, and set IP address assign to Automatic(DHCP).

Step 4 Tap to go back to the main menu screen.

After setting parameters for the integrated UPS, the ECC800 discovers the access from the integrated
UPS automatically.

----End

8.1.8.2 How to Set and Add a UPS2000-G?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM_1 or COM_2 port on
the Modbus expansion card of the UPS2000-G, and the other end has been connected to the
COM port on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set monitoring parameters for the UPS2000-G.
 Set monitoring parameters for the UPS2000-G-(1-3 kVA).

Operate the DIP switch SW1 on the optional Modbus card to set the UPS2000-G device address. Toggle
switches 1 to 8 of DIP switch SW1 specify the device address in binary mode. ON indicates 1, and OFF
indicates 0.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Table 8-1 Setting a device address

Device Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle


Addre Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
ss 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

 Set monitoring parameters for the UPS2000-G-(6–20 kVA).

Operate the DIP switch S2 on the optional Modbus card to set the UPS2000-G device address. Toggle
switches 1 to 8 of DIP switch S2 specify the device address in binary mode. ON indicates 0, and OFF
indicates 1.

Table 8-2 Setting a device address

Device Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle


Addre Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
ss 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
2 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
3 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
4 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON

Step 2 Add a UPS2000-G.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a UPS2000-G.

Table 8-3 Adding a UPS2000-G

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select UPS from the drop-down list box.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select UPS2000G-A from the drop-down list box.
Management
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Device. The Communications Select COM2 from the drop-down list box.
parameters for Port NOTE
adding devices
The setting example indicates that the UPS2000-G is
are displayed. connected to the COM2 port on the ECC800. If the

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Path Parameter Setting


Name
UPS2000-G is connected to another port, enter the
number of the connected port.

Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


actual configuration, set the device address for the
UPS2000-G based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the UPS2000-G connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the UPS2000-G connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the UPS2000-G does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the
cable between the UPS2000-G and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the
UPS2000-G and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters
are consistent with the UPS2000-G parameters.

The section describes how to add a UPS2000-G in a single UPS scenario. In a parallel UPS scenario, if
the common communications address of the Modbus card is added to the ECC800, all UPS2000-Gs can
be connected to the ECC800.

----End

8.1.8.3 How to Set and Add a UPS5000-E?

Prerequisites
 One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the
UPS5000-E monitoring module, and the other end has been connected to the COM port
on the ETH converter.
 When connecting devices, you are advised to add devices one by one and ensure that the
view is consistent with the real object. If all devices have been added and powered on,
only the BLINK function of the ETH converter can be used to identify the mapping
between the UPS5000-E and ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the UPS5000-E monitoring parameters.
1. On the displayed screen after UPS5000-E startup, tap System Info.
2. Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password 000001, and

press .
3. Tap Communication and set RS485 baud rate to 9600, and RS485 address to 1 on the
displayed communication settings screen.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-11 UPS5000-E communication settings

Step 2 Add a UPS5000-E.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a UPS5000-E.

Table 8-4 Adding a UPS5000-E

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select UPS from the drop-down list box.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select UPS5000 from the drop-down list box.
Management Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list
Connect To
and click Add
box.
Device. The
parameters for Communications Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-down list box.
adding devices Port
are displayed.
Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During
actual configuration, set the device address for the
UPS5000-E based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the UPS5000-E connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the UPS5000-E connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the UPS5000-E does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the
cable between the UPS5000-E and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the
UPS5000-E and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters
are consistent with the UPS5000-E parameters.
4. Choose Monitoring > System > ETH Converter Group > ETH Converter n >
Running Parameters and set Device name to ETH Converter n_Device name.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.8.4 How to Set and Add a PDU8000 or integrated PDF (over


Modbus-TCP)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on the PDU8000 or
integrated PDF, and the other end has been connected to the POE port on the smart ETH
gateway.

Context
The method of connecting the PDU8000 to the ECC800 is the same as that for the integrated
PDF. Connecting the integrated PDF to the ECC800 by following the instructions in this
section.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the PDU8000 monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the PDU8000 home page, tap System Info.
2. Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password 000001, and

press .
3. Tap Communication to set IP address assign to Automatic(DHCP) on the displayed
communication settings screen and the PDU8000 is discovered by ECC800
automatically and is connected to the ECC800.
----End

8.1.8.5 How to Set and Add a PDU8000 (over Modbus RTU)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM port on the PDU8000,
and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800 collector, rack
environment unit, or ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the PDU8000 monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the PDU8000 home page, tap System Info.
2. Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password 000001, and

press . In the password message dialog box displayed, click Confirm.


3. Tap Communication and check IP address assign to Manual. And set Serial port
baud rate to 9600, and Serial port address to 1 on the displayed communication
settings screen.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-12 PDU8000 communication settings screen

Step 2 Add a PDU8000 (Modbus-RTU).


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a PDU8000.

Table 8-5 Adding a PDU8000

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select PDU from the drop-down list box.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select PDU8000 from the drop-down list box.
Management
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Device. The Communications Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
parameters for Port NOTE
adding devices
The setting example indicates that the PDU8000 is
are displayed. connected to the COM1 port on the ECC800. If the
PDU8000 is connected to another port, enter the number
of the connected port.

Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


actual configuration, set the device address for the
PDU8000 based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PDU8000 connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the PDU8000 connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the PDU8000 does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the PDU8000 and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

PDU8000 and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the PDU8000 parameters.
----End

8.1.8.6 How to Set and Add a PDU2000?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM 1 or COM 2 port on the
PDU2000, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800 collector,
rack environment unit, or ETH converter.

Context

Table 8-6 PDU2000 basic Information

Vendor Name Displayed on Eleventh and Twelfth Characters in


the WebUI Device Barcodea

Clever PDU2000-M (C) FT


Haipengxin PDU2000-M (H) 6B
a: The barcode starts with 21 and is attached to the device.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the PDU2000 monitoring parameters.
 Set the PDU2000-M (C) monitoring parameters.

The display of a single-phase module is used as an example.


− After the PDU2000-M (C) is powered on, the LCM displays the initialization
screen.

Figure 8-13 PDU2000-M (C) initialization screen

− Press MENU to enter the device communications address screen.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-14 PDU2000-M (C) communications settings

− Set address to 1 by pressing DOWN and UP.


− Press MENU to confirm the settings.

The parameter settings take effect only if you press MENU and then the PDU2000-M (C) buzzes and
restarts. If you do not press MENU, the PDU2000-M (C) buzzes and restarts automatically after 30s and
the settings are not saved.
 Set the PDU2000-M (H) monitoring parameters

The display of a single-phase module is used as an example.


− After the PDU2000-M (H) is powered on, press MENU. The LCM displays

.
− Press MENU again to access the device communications address screen.

Figure 8-15 PDU2000-M (H) communications settings

− Press DOWN and UP to select the address to be set.


− Press MENU to confirm the settings.

If modification is successful, is displayed: If modification fails, is


displayed:

Step 2 Add a PDU2000.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a PDU2000.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Table 8-7 Adding a PDU2000

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select PDU from the drop-down list box.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select PDU2000-M (C) or PDU2000-M (H) from
Management the drop-down list box based on the actual device.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
parameters for Communications Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
adding devices Port NOTE
are displayed.
The setting example indicates that the PDU2000 is
connected to the COM1 port on the ECC800. If the
PDU2000 is connected to another port, enter the number
of the connected port.

Device Address Enter the actual device address of the PDU2000.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PDU2000-M connects to the ECC800
properly.
− If the PDU2000 connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the PDU2000 does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the PDU2000 and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the
PDU2000 and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the PDU2000 parameters.
----End

8.1.8.7 How to Set and Add an ATS?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM port on the ATS, and
the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800 collector, rack environment
unit, or ETH converter.

Context
The ATS (ABB) model is OMD800.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the ATS device address. On the ATS display panel, choose Device Configuration >
Modbus and set the device address.

 The ATS device address is 1 by default.


 The initial password is 0001 for the ATS display panel.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Step 2 Add an ATS.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add an ATS.

Table 8-8 Adding an ATS

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select ATS from the drop-down list box.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select ATS from the drop-down list box.
Management
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Device. The Communications Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
parameters for Port NOTE
adding devices
The setting example indicates that the ATS is connected to
are displayed. the COM1 port on the ECC800. If the ATS is connected to
another port, enter the number of the connected port.

Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


actual configuration, set the device address for the
ATS based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the ATS connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the ATS connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected devices
are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the ATS does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the ATS and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the ATS and
ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are consistent with
the ATS parameters.
----End

8.1.8.8 How to Set and Add a PMAC615 AC Meter?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the PMAC615
AC meter, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800.

Context
The model of the single-phase AC meter for the lighting control box is PMAC615.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the PMAC615 communications address.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

1. After the PMAC615 is started, press on the displayed screen and the configuration
screen is displayed. Press until the ID prompt is displayed, indicating the
communications address setting screen.

2. Press and a blinking cursor is displayed. Press to modify the communications

address based on site requirements. Then press to confirm the address setting.

Figure 8-16 PMAC615 communications address

Step 2 Add a PMAC615.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a PMAC615.

Table 8-9 Adding a PMAC615

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Electricity Meter from the drop-down list
Settings > box.
Device
Management Device Type Select PMAC615 from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
parameters for Communications Select COM3 from the drop-down list box.
adding devices Port NOTE
are displayed.
The setting example indicates that the PMAC615 is
connected to the COM3 port on the ECC800. If the
PMAC615 is connected to another port, enter the number
of the connected port.

Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 8. During


actual configuration, set the device address for the
PMAC615 based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PMAC615 connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the PMAC615 connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the PMAC615 does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the PMAC615 and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the
PMAC615 and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the PMAC615 parameters.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

----End

8.1.8.9 How to Set and Add a PMAC625 AC Meter?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the PMAC625
AC meter, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800.

Context
 The model of the three-phase AC power meter for the PDC is PMAC625.
 When connecting devices, you are advised to add devices one by one. If all devices have
been added and powered on, only the BLINK function of the ETH converter can be used
to identify the mapping between the PMAC625 and ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the PMAC625 communications address.

1. Press on the displayed screen after the PMAC625 is started. Press after
entering the programming mode. Modify the password (1 by default) in blinking ones
digit by pressing or , and press to confirm the setting.

Figure 8-17 Programming screen of the PMAC625

2. Enter the communications address setting screen by pressing or , and press


to confirm the setting.

3. Select the place of the communications address value to be modified by pressing


or , modify the communications address value (ranging from 1 to 247) by pressing
or , and then press to save the setting.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-18 Communications address of the PMAC625

Step 2 Add a PMAC625.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a PMAC625.

Table 8-10 Adding a PMAC625

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Electricity Meter from the drop-down list
Settings > box.
Device
Management Device Type Select PMAC625 from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list
Device. The
box.
parameters for
adding devices Communications Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-down list box.
are displayed. Port
Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 100.
During actual configuration, set the device address
for the PMAC625 based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PMAC625 connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the PMAC625 connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the PMAC625 does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the PMAC625 and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the
PMAC625 and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the PMAC625 parameters.
4. Choose Monitoring > System > ETH Converter Group > ETH Converter n >
Running Parameters and set Device name to ETH Converter n_Device name.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.8.10 How to Set and Add a PDC DC Meter?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the PDC DC
meter, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800.

Context
The model of the PDC is PDU8000-0630DCV5-HVA002 and the BOM number is 02403121.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the communications address for the PDC DC meter.
1. Tap Settings on the screen after the PDC DC meter is started.
2. Enter 1 in the displayed password dialog box, tap Enter, and then tap Confirm to enter
the setting screen.
3. Set the communications address. Tap the ID under Device ID on the displayed setting
screen, enter 2 (the actual value prevails) using the keyboard that pops up, and then tap
Enter.
4. Press the restart button at the rear of the monitoring screen. Then the parameters take
effect.

The communications address is 1 by default.

Step 2 Add a PDC DC meter.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a PDC DC meter.

Table 8-11 Adding a PDC DC meter

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device Select Electricity Meter from the drop-down list
Settings > attribute box.
Device
Management Device Type Select LF DC Meter from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
parameters for Communicatio Select COM2 from the drop-down list box.
adding devices ns Port NOTE
are displayed.
The setting example indicates that the DC meter is
connected to the COM2 port on the ECC800. If the DC
meter is connected to another port, enter the number of the
connected port.

Device In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


Address actual configuration, set the device address for the
PDC DC meter based on the actual situation.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PDC DC meter connects to the ECC800
properly.
− If the PDC DC meter connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The
connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the PDC DC meter does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the
cable between the PDC DC meter and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether
the PDC DC meter and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input
parameters are consistent with the PDC DC meter parameters.
----End

8.1.8.11 How to Set and Add an AC PDC MA01C?

Prerequisites
The first and second wires at one end of a network cable have been connected to pins 5 and 6
on the signal terminal block in the AC PDC MA01C, and the other end has been connected to
the COM port on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Add an AC PDC MA01C.
1. Add an AC PDC MA01C.

Table 8-12 Adding an AC PDC MA01C

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select PDU from the drop-down list box.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select AC_PDC_MA01C from the drop-down list
Management box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list
Device. The
box.
parameters for
adding devices Communications Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-down list box.
are displayed. Port
Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During
actual configuration, set the device address based
on the actual situation.

2. Click Test Connect to check whether the AC PDC MA01C connects to the ECC800
properly.
− If the AC PDC MA01C connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The
connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

− If the AC PDC MA01C does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether
the cable between the AC PDC MA01C and the ECC800 is connected properly,
whether the AC PDC MA01C and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the
input parameters are consistent with the AC PDC MA01C parameters.
----End

8.1.8.12 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A042 Parameters?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE_1 port on the
NetCol5000-A042 main control board, and the other end has been connected to the POE port
on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set NetCol5000-A042 monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the NetCol5000-A042 home page, click Settings, choose the user name admin,
and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of the NetCol5000-A042 is
displayed.
2. Choose Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to Automatic (DHCP),
and click Submit.
3. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, and set Connection mode to
Server and client, Server encryption to Enable.

After the NetCol5000-A042 parameters are set, the ECC800 can automatically identify the automatic
access of the NetCol5000-A042.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the 42 kW smart cooling product on the
ECC800 WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A0421.

0421 in NetCol5000-A0421 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product model and
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set running parameters.
4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.8.13 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-C030 Parameters (over Modbus


TCP)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on the
NetCol5000-C030 main control board, and the other end has been connected to the POE port
on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set NetCol5000-C030 monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the NetCol5000-C030 home page, click Settings, choose user name admin and
enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of the NetCol5000-C030 is
displayed.
2. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to
Automatic(DHCP), and tap Submit.
3. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, and set Connection mode to
Server and client, Server encryption to Enable.

 After setting parameters for the NetCol5000-C030, the ECC800 discovers the access from the smart
cooling product automatically.
 The earlier version has Protocol setting on the screen. The actual screen prevails.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000-C030 on the WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-C0301.

0301 in NetCol5000-C0301 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product model and
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product running parameters.
4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.8.14 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-C030 (over Modbus RTU)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the J73 communications port on
the NetCol5000-C030 main control board, and the other end has been connected to the COM
port on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set NetCol5000-C030 monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the NetCol5000-C030 home page, click Settings, choose the user name Admin
and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of the NetCol5000-C030 is
displayed.
2. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, choose Baud rate to 9600 and
set Comm address to 1.

The earlier version has Protocol setting on the screen. The actual screen prevails.

Step 2 Add a NetCol5000-C030.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a NetCol5000-C030.

Table 8-13 Adding a NetCol5000-C030

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list
Settings > box.
Device
Management Device Type Select NetCol5000-C030 from the drop-down list
and click Add box.
Device. The
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
parameters for
adding devices Communications Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
are displayed. Port NOTE
The setting example indicates that the NetCol5000-C030
is connected to the COM1 port on the ECC800. If the
NetCol5000-C030 is connected to another port, enter the
number of the connected port.

Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


actual configuration, set the device address for the
NetCol5000-C030 based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the NetCol5000-C030 connects to the ECC800
properly.
− If the NetCol5000-C030 connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The
connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

− If the NetCol5000-C030 does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether
the cable between the NetCol5000-C030 and the ECC800 is connected properly,
whether the NetCol5000-C030 and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the
input parameters are consistent with the NetCol5000-C030 parameters.
Step 3 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000-C030 on the WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-C0301.

0301 in NetCol5000-C0301 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product model and
connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product running parameters.
4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.15 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A025 Parameters (over


MAC-Modbus)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on the
NetCol5000-A025 main control board, and the other end has been connected to the POE port
on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set NetCol5000-A025 monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the NetCol5000-A025 home page, click Settings, choose the user name admin,
and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of the NetCol5000-A025 is
displayed.
2. Choose Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to Automatic (DHCP),
and click Submit.
3. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, and set Connection mode to
Server and client, Server encryption to Enable.

After the NetCol5000-A025 parameters are set, the ECC800 can automatically identify the automatic
access of the NetCol5000-A025.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the 25 kW smart cooling product on the
ECC800 WebUI.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.


2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A0251.

 0251 in NetCol5000-A0251 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product model
and connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set running parameters.
4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.16 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A025 Parameters (over


Modbus-TCP)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on the
NetCol5000-A025 main control board, and the other end has been connected to the POE port
on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set NetCol5000-A025 monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the NetCol5000-A025 home page, click Settings, choose the user name admin,
and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of the NetCol5000-A025 is
displayed.
2. Choose Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to Automatic (DHCP),
and click Submit.
3. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, and set Connection mode to
Server and client, Server encryption to Enable.

After the NetCol5000-A025 parameters are set, the ECC800 can automatically identify the automatic
access of the NetCol5000-A025.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the 25 kW smart cooling product on the
ECC800 WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A0251.

 0251 in NetCol5000-A0251 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product model
and connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set running parameters.


4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.17 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000-A010 Parameters (over


MAC-Modbus)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on the
NetCol5000-A010 main control board, and the other end has been connected to the POE port
on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000-A010 on the ECC800
WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A0101.

 0101 in NetCol5000-A0101 is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product model
and connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set running parameters.
4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.18 How Do I Set NetCol5000CF_110HALF Parameters (Modbus-TCP)?

Prerequisites
Connecting a straight-through cable from the NetCol5000CF_110HALF to the POE port on
the smart ETH gateway is used as an example here.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Context
The chilled water smart cooling product is displayed as NetCol5000CF_110HALF on the
ECC WebUI and the corresponding smart cooling product is NetCol5000-C(030, 032).

Procedure
Step 1 Set the NetCol5000CF_110HALF monitoring parameters.
1. Enter the home page, click Settings, select user name Admin, enter password 000001,
and click Log In. The NetCol5000CF_110HALF settings page is displayed.
2. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to Automatic
(DHCP), and click Submit.
3. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, set Link mode to Server and
client, and set Server encryption to Enable.

After the parameters are set, the ECC800 can automatically identify the NetCol5000CF_110HALF.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000CF_110HALF on the
WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as the administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Air Conditioner > NetCol5000CF-110HALF1.

 The following describes how to set the NetCol5000CF-110HALF1.


 110HALFx in NetCol5000CF_110HALFx is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling
product model and connection sequence. x indicates the smart cooling product connection sequence.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set the smart cooling product running parameters,
temperature and humidity parameters, and alarm parameters.
4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).
----End

8.1.8.19 How to Set and Add a NetCol5000CF_110 Parameters (over


Modbus-TCP)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on the
NetCol5000CF_110 main control board, and the other end has been connected to the POE
port on the smart ETH gateway.

Context
The chilled water smart cooling product is displayed as NetCol5000CF_110 on the ECC800
WebUI and the corresponding smart cooling product is NetCol5000-C(065, 080).

Procedure
Step 1 Set the NetCol5000CF_110 monitoring parameters.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

1. Enter the home page, click Settings, select user name Admin, enter password 000001,
and click Log In. The NetCol5000CF_110 settings page is displayed.
2. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to Automatic
(DHCP), and click Submit.
3. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, set Link mode to Server and
client, and set Server encryption to Enable.

After the parameters are set, the ECC800 can automatically identify the NetCol5000CF_110.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000CF_110 on the WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as the administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000CF-1101.

 The following describes how to set the NetCol5000CF-1101.


 110x in NetCol5000CF_110x is variable and subject to change with the smart cooling product
model and connection sequence. x indicates the smart cooling product connection sequence.
3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set the smart cooling product running
parameters.
4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as
on/off control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.20 How to Set and Add a SUNRISE SCU-20K?

Prerequisites
 One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the
SUNRISE-SCU-20K, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ETH
converter.
 When connecting devices, you are advised to add devices one by one and ensure that the
view is consistent with the real object. If all devices have been added and powered on,
only the BLINK function of the ETH converter can be used to identify the mapping
between the SUNRISE-SCU-20K and ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the SUNRISE-SCU-20K monitoring parameters.
1. After SUNRISE-SCU-20K startup, tap Settings on the home screen and enter the
password 111111 to enter the parameter settings screen.
2. Choose Settings > Comm Settings, and set Monitoring baud rate to 9600, and set
Monitoring address based on site requirements.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

 The default value of Monitoring address is 1 for the SUNRISE-SCU-20K.


 If multiple SUNRISE-SCU-20K devices are connected to a same smart module, ensure that each
monitoring address of a SUNRISE-SCU-20K is unique.

Step 2 Add a SUNRISE-SCU-20K.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a SUNRISE-SCU-20K.

Table 8-14 Adding a SUNRISE-SCU-20K

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list
Settings > box.
Device
Management Device Type Select SUNRISE-SCU-20K from the drop-down
and click Add list box.
Device. The
Connect To Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list
parameters for
box.
adding devices
are displayed. Communications Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-down list box.
Port
Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 2. During
actual configuration, set the device address based
on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the SUNRISE-SCU-20K connects to the ECC800
properly.
− If the SUNRISE-SCU-20K connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The
connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the SUNRISE-SCU-20K does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check
whether the cable between the SUNRISE-SCU-20K and the ECC800 is connected
properly, whether the SUNRISE-SCU-20K and ECC800 are running properly, and
whether the input parameters are consistent with the SUNRISE-SCU-20K
parameters.
4. Choose Monitoring > System > ETH Converter Group > ETH Converter n >
Running Parameters and set Device name to ETH Converter n_Device name.
5. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > SUNRISE-SCU-20K n > Running Parameters and
set Device name to SUNRISE-SCU-20K_Device name.
Step 3 On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product running parameters.
Step 4 On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as on/off
control parameters).

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.21 How to Set and Add a Rack-mounted HR04A

Prerequisites
 One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the
Rack-mounted HR04A, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the
ETH converter.
 When connecting devices, you are advised to add devices one by one and ensure that the
view is consistent with the real object. If all devices have been added and powered on,
only the BLINK function of the ETH converter can be used to identify the mapping
between the rack-mounted HR04A and ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Add a rack-mounted HR04A.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a rack-mounted HR04A.

Table 8-15 Adding a rack-mounted air conditioner HR04A

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list
Settings > box.
Device
Management Device type Select rack-mounted air conditioner HR04A
and click Add from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
Connect to Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list
parameters for
box.
adding devices
are displayed. Communications Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
port
Device address In this example, Device address is set to 1. During
actual configuration, set the device address based
on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the rack-mounted HR04A connects to the ECC800
properly.
− If the rack-mounted HR04A connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The
connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

− If the rack-mounted HR04A does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check
whether the cable between the rack-mounted HR04A and the ECC800 is connected
properly, whether the rack-mounted HR04A and ECC800 are running properly, and
whether the input parameters are consistent with the rack-mounted HR04A
parameters.
Step 2 On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product running parameters.
1. Choose Monitoring > System > ETH Converter Group > ETH Converter n >
Running Parameters and set Device name to ETH Converter n_Device name.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Rack-mounted air conditioner HR04A n > Running
Parameters and set Device name to Rack-mounted air conditioner HR04A_Device
name.

It is recommended that Supply air temperature settings in Running Parameters be set to 20°C,
Return air temperature settings be set to 30°C, and Dehumidification settings be set to 50% RH.

Step 3 On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as on/off
control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.22 How Do I Add and Set an Envicool SC15?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the Envicool
SC15, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Add an Envicool SC15.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add an Envicool SC15.

Table 8-16 Adding an Envicool SC15

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list
Settings > box.
Device
Management Device type Select Envicool SC15 from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect to Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Device. The box.
parameters for
adding devices Communications Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-down list box.
are displayed. port
Device address In this example, Device address is set to 1. During
actual configuration, set the device address based
on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the Envicool SC15 connects to the ECC800
properly.
− If the Envicool SC15 connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The
connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the Envicool SC15 does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the
cable between the Envicool SC15 and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether
the Envicool SC15 and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input
parameters are consistent with the Envicool SC15 parameters.
4. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Envicool SC15 n > Running Parameters and set
Device name to Envicool SC15_Device name.
Step 2 On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product running parameters.
Step 3 On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters (such as on/off
control parameters).

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smart module increases
and data running is affected. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

8.1.8.23 How Do I Add and Set an AIRSYS Air Conditioner?

Procedure
Step 1 Add an AIRSYS air conditioner.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add an AIRSYS air conditioner.

Table 8-17 Adding an AIRSYS air conditioner

Path Parameter Parameter Value


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Path Parameter Parameter Value


Name
Settings > box.
Device
Management, Device Type Select Airsys from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device.
Port Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
NOTE
The setting example indicates that the AIRSYS air
conditioner is connected to the COM1 port on the
ECC800. If the AIRSYS air conditioner is connected to
another port, enter the number of the connected port.

Device Address Enter the actual device address of the AIRSYS air
conditioner. In this section, 1 is used as an example.
WARNING
Ensure that the device address of each AIRSYS air
conditioner is unique. Otherwise, the teamwork function
may be affected.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the AIRSYS air conditioner is connected to the
ECC800 properly.
− If the AIRSYS air conditioner is connected properly, click Confirm. The device
connection information is displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the AIRSYS air conditioner is not connected properly, check whether the cable
between the air conditioner and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the air
conditioner and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the air conditioner parameters.
Step 2 Set the running parameters for the AIRSYS air conditioner on the WebUI.
1. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Airsys.
2. On the Running Parameters tab page, set the running parameters for the air
conditioner.
Step 3 Set teamwork control for the AIRSYS air conditioner.
1. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters, and set Air conditioner
teamwork enable to Enable.
2. Set Average room temperature threshold.

When the operating AIRSYS air conditioners detect that the average room temperature is 5°C higher
than the value of Average room temperature threshold, the standby AIRSYS air conditioners switch to
the Unit on state and teamwork control is not implemented. When the operating AIRSYS air
conditioners detect that the average room temperature is 2°C lower than the value of Average room
temperature threshold, the original standby AIRSYS air conditioners switch to the OFF by monitor
state, and teamwork control recovers.
3. (Optional) Set Time acceleration multiples. The default time for entering the teamwork
mode is 24 h. After the setting, the time for entering the teamwork mode can be
shortened.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Time acceleration multiples is used for teamwork control demonstration. Its default value is .

----End

8.1.8.24 How to Set and Add a Dehumidifier HT-500?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port on the
Dehumidifier HT-500, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800
collector.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Dehumidifier HT-500.
Step 3 On the Running Parameters page, set Humidity.
Step 4 On the Controls tab page, set Switch Controls.
----End

8.1.8.25 How to Set and Add an IP Device?

Prerequisites
 An IP device is connected to the ECC800 over a switch. The device and ECC800 have
been powered on.
 You have obtained the IP address of the IP device.

Context
 IP devices, such as ATMs, are devices with IP attributes in an equipment room or site. By
adding an IP device, you connect the device to the ECC800 in the same network so that
the ECC800 monitors the device status. If the IP device is offline, the ECC800 will
report a disconnection alarm on its WebUI.

In a LAN scenario, the IP device and the ECC800 collector must be in the same network.
 Following is a procedure example about how to add five IP devices with the online
detection timeout interval being 29 seconds.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters.
Step 3 Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, on the IP Device Detection Parameters tab page, set
Online detection timeout interval to 29. The value range is 10 to 60 seconds. Click Submit.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Online detection timeout interval is 30 by default, which means that the ECC800 determines that the
communication with the device is interrupted if the device has no response within 30 seconds.

Step 4 Set IP device num to 5. The value range is 0 to 100.


Step 5 Click Submit. The IP Device 1-5 tab page is displayed.
Step 6 On the IP Device 1-5 tab page, set Enable online detection IP device 1 to Enable.
Step 7 Click Submit.
Step 8 Specify IP device 1 address.

 Set IP device 1 address to the IP address of IP device 1. For example, set IP device 1 address to
192.168.2.137.
 Add other IP devices in the same way.

Step 9 Click Submit.


Step 10 (Optional) If you need to change the name of an IP device, perform the following steps:
1. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration
page is displayed.
2. Set Device Type to ECC800, set Device Name to ECC800, and click OK.
3. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of IP device 1 to XXX and click
Submit.
----End

8.1.8.26 How to Set and Add an Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM_IN port on the
independent deployment AI_DI unit, and the other end has been connected to the COM port
on the ECC800 collector, rack environment unit, or ETH converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set monitoring parameters for the independent deployment AI_DI unit.
Set the address of the independent deployment AI_DI unit to 1 or 2 by setting its DIP switch.
The DIP switch consists of toggle switches 1–4 (from left to right). Toggle switches 1–3
specify the address of the independent deployment AI_DI unit. Toggle switch 4 specifies the
address of the RS485 build-out resistor. 1 indicates ON, and 0 indicates OFF.

The device address for the independent deployment AI/DI unit can only be set to 1 or 2.

Table 8-18 Setting a device address

Address Toggle Switch 1 Toggle Switch 2 Toggle Switch 3

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Address Toggle Switch 1 Toggle Switch 2 Toggle Switch 3


1 OFF ON ON
2 ON OFF ON

If the signal quality is poor due to signal reflection caused by long communications cables (longer than
50 m), set toggle switch 4 to ON for the furthest independent deployment AI_DI unit. After the DIP
switch settings are modified, power off and restart the independent deployment AI_DI unit for the new
settings to take effect.

Step 2 Add an independent deployment AI_DI unit.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add an independent deployment AI_DI unit.

Table 8-19 Adding an independent deployment AI_DI unit

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device Select Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit from
Settings > attribute the drop-down list box.
Device
Management Device Type Select Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit from
and click Add the drop-down list box.
Device. The
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
parameters for
adding devices Communicatio Select COM3 from the drop-down list box.
are displayed. ns Port NOTE
The setting example indicates that the independent
deployment AI_DI unit is connected to the COM3 port on
the ECC800. If the independent deployment AI_DI unit is
connected to another port, set the COM port to the ECC800
port connected to the independent deployment AI_DI unit.

Device In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


Address actual configuration, set the device address for the
independent deployment AI_DI unit based on the
actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the independent deployment AI_DI unit connects
to the ECC800 properly.
a. If the independent deployment AI_DI unit connects to the ECC800 properly, click
Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected
devices list.
b. If the independent deployment AI_DI unit does not connect to the ECC800 properly,
check whether the cable between the independent deployment AI_DI unit and the
ECC800 is connected properly, whether the independent deployment AI_DI unit
and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are consistent
with the parameters of the independent deployment AI_DI unit.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

----End

8.1.8.27 How to Set and Add the Multi-functional Sensor?


If a multi-functional sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the POE port on the
multi-functional sensor, and the other end has been connected to the POE port on the ETH
converter.

Procedure
Step 1 Set multi-functional sensor parameters.
On the WebUI, choose Monitoring > Aisle > Multi-Func Sensor Group > Multi-Func
Sensor1 > Running Parameters, ensure that Smoke enable and Temp enable are set to
Enable, set High temperature alarm threshold and other parameters as required, and then
click Submit.

If multiple multi-functional sensors are connected, commission one multi-functional sensor first and
then commission the other multi-functional sensors in the same way.

Step 2 Check the functions of the multi-functional sensor.

Table 8-20 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Temperature and humidity You can view the current ambient temperature and
detection: View the running humidity.
information about the
multi-functional sensor on the
WebUI.
Smoke detection: Simulate a  Start counting time immediately when smoke is
smoky environment. entering the hole. After about 30 seconds, the red
Smoke generation methods: ALM indicator turns on, and the app or WebUI
Generate smoke. Place the paper displays a smoke alarm.
5–10 cm away from the smoke  Some time later after the smoke is dispersed, the red
compartment, and let smoke ALM indicator turns off and the smoke alarm
enter the smoke compartment disappears.
through the hole in the side of
the multi-functional sensor.
Smoke dispersing method: Send
clean air to the smoke
compartment through the hole in
the side of the multi-functional
sensor.
CAUTION
 Do not generate open flame, and
ensure that smoke does not

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Check Method Normal Connection Status


damage any device.
 When testing the smoke
detection function of the
multi-functional sensor, do not
start the smart cooling product
or fan, because the air from the
smart cooling product or fan
will interfere with the smoke,
and therefore affect the
detection result.
 After the commissioning is
complete, clean up dust.

Figure 8-19 Detecting smoke

(1) Smoke compartment (2) ALM indicator

----End

8.1.8.28 How to Set and Add the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI
Port on the ECC800)?
If a smoke sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
 Connecting Cables to the Smoke sensor (NC):

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

The smoke detector has been connected to the AI/DI port on the ECC800 collector using
a network cable.
To connect the cable for the smoke detector, perform the following steps:
Short-circuit core wires 1 and 8 on the other end of the network cable, and connect the
network cable to the cable delivered with the smoke detector. The following table
describes the cable connection.

Table 8-21 Smoke detector cable connection

Wire of the Network Cable Smoke Detector Cable


Core wire 1 (orange-white), core wire 8 GND (black)
(brown)
Core wire 3 (green-white) +12 V (red)
Core wire 6 (green) Normally closed end (yellow)
Core wire 7 (brown-white) Common end (green)
None (reserved; no connection needed and Normally open end (blue)
to be insulated)

 Connecting Cables to the Smoke Sensor:


One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 1 (orange-white), 5
(white-blue) and 8 (brown) have been short-circuited, core wires 3(green-white) and
6(green) have been connected to the cable delivered with the smoke detector, and the
other end of the network cable has been connected to the AI/DI port on the rack
environment unit.

Context
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is described.

Procedure
Step 1 Set smoke detector parameters.

In this example, the smoke detector is connected to the AI/DI_2 port on the ECC800.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration
page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Smoke and click
Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2 Port
Settings.
6. Set Smoke sensor to Enable and click Submit.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

7. Confirm that Smoke sensor type is automatically identified as Smoke sensor or Smoke
sensor(NC). Ensure that Smoke power supply is Yes.
Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of smoke detector.

Table 8-22 Commissioning the sensor

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method


Simulate a smoky Smoke DI alarm is displayed on  If Smoke sensor type is set
environment under the active alarm page of the app to Smoke Sensor, power off
the smoke sensor. or WebUI. and reset the smoke sensor to
clear the alarm.
 If Smoke sensor type is set
to Smoke Sensor(NC), press
the reset button of the smoke
sensor to clear the alarm.

----End

8.1.8.29 How to Set and Add the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI
Port on the Skylight Actuator)?
If a smoke sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
The smoke detector has been connected to the AI/DI port on the skylight actuator using a
network cable.
To connect the cable for the smoke detector, perform the following steps:
Short-circuit core wires 1 and 8 on the other end of the network cable, and connect the
network cable to the cable delivered with the smoke detector. The following table describes
the cable connection.

Table 8-23 Smoke detector cable connection

Wire of the Network Cable Smoke Detector Cable


Core wire 1 (orange-white), core wire 8 GND (black)
(brown)
Core wire 3 (green-white) +12 V (red)
Core wire 6 (green) Normally closed end (yellow)
Core wire 7 (brown-white) Common end (green)
None (reserved; no connection needed and Normally open end (blue)
to be insulated)

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Context
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is described.

Procedure
Step 1 Set smoke sensor parameters.

In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the skylight actuator.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > Skylight Actuator Group > Skylight Actuator 1 >
Running Parameters > DI1 alarm level.
3. Set DI1 alarm level to Low voltage alarm or High voltage alarm, and click Submit.

 Set DI1 alarm level to Low voltage alarm if the smoke sensor is connected over NO.
 Set DI1 alarm level to High voltage alarm if the smoke sensor is connected over NC.

Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of smoke sensor.

Table 8-24 Commissioning the sensor

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method


Simulate a smoky DI1_smoke alarm is displayed Press the reset button of the
environment under on the active alarm page of the smoke sensor to clear the alarm.
the smoke sensor. app or WebUI.

----End

8.1.8.30 How to Set and Add the Smoke Detector (Connected to the AI/DI
Port on the Rack Environment Unit)?
If a smoke sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 1, 5 and 8 have been
short-circuited, core wires 3 and 6 have been connected to the cable delivered with the smoke
detector, and the other end of the network cable has been connected to the AI/DI port on the
rack environment unit.

Context
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is described.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Procedure
Step 1 Set smoke sensor parameters.

In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the rack environment unit.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > Cabinet Collector n > Running
Parameters.
3. In AI/DI_1 Port Settings area, set AI/DI_1 sensor to Enable, click Submit.
4. Set AI/DI_1 sensor type to Smoke sensor, click Submit.
Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of smoke detector.

Table 8-25 Commissioning the sensor

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method


Simulate a smoky Smoke sensor status(AI/DI_1) If Smoke sensor type is Smoke
environment under is displayed on the active alarm Sensor, power off and reset the
the smoke sensor. page of the app or WebUI. smoke sensor to clear the alarm.

----End

8.1.8.31 How to Set and Add the WLDS900 Water Sensor?


If a water sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on the WLDS900
water sensor, and the other end has been connected to the AI/DI port on the ECC800.

Context
 To use the AI/DI sensor, enable the corresponding AI/DI port and name the sensor. The
specific alarm then can be reported.
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is described.

Procedure
Step 1 Set water sensor parameters.

 In this example, the water sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the ECC800.
 The default alarm severity of the AI/DI port is Minor. If you want to change the alarm severity, see
How Should I Configure Alarm Parameters.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration
page is displayed.
3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Leak and click
Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1 Port
Settings.
6. Set Leak sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Confirm that Leak sensor type is automatically identified as Leak sensor(Rope).
Ensure that Leak power supply is Yes.
Step 2 Check functions of water sensors.

Table 8-26 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method


Immerse the water Leak DI alarm is generated on Wipe dry the water detection
detection cable in the active alarm screen of the cable. The alarm disappears
water. app or on the WebUI. automatically.

----End

8.1.8.32 How to Set and Add the WLDS600 Water Sensor?


If a water sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on the WLDS600
water sensor, and the other end has been connected to the energized COM port on the
ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 The default communications address 1 of the water sensor is used for connecting to the
ECC800.
Step 2 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 3 Add the water sensor.

Table 8-27 Adding the water sensor

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device attribute Select Sensor from the drop-down list box.
Settings >
Device Device Type Select Water Sensor from the drop-down list box.
Management Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Path Parameter Setting


Name
and click Add Communications Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The Port
parameters for NOTE
adding devices The setting example indicates that the water sensor is
connected to the COM1 port on the ECC800. If the water
are displayed. sensor is connected to another port, enter the number of
the connected port.

Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


actual configuration, set the device address for the
water sensor based on the actual situation.

Step 4 Click Test Connect to check whether the water sensor connects to the ECC800 properly.
 If the water sensor connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
 If the water sensor does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the water sensor and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the water
sensor and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the water sensor parameters.
Step 5 Set water sensor parameters.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > System > Water Sensor > Running Parameters.
3. Set the parameters based on actual conditions, and click Submit.
Step 6 Check functions of water sensors.

Table 8-28 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance


Method
Immerse the water  Choose Monitoring > System > Wipe dry the water
detection cable in Water Sensor > Running Info. detection cable. The alarm
water. Check that Leakage status is Alarm disappears automatically.
and Distance from the leakage
point is greater than 0 m.
 Choose Home > Active Alarms.
Check that a water sensor alarm is
generated.

----End

8.1.8.33 How to Set and Add the Electrode Water Sensor?


If a water sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Prerequisites
One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 6 and 7 have been connected to
the cable delivered with the electrode water sensor, and the other end of the network cable has
been connected to the AI/DI port on the rack environment unit.

Context
 To use the AI/DI sensor, enable the corresponding AI/DI port and name the sensor. The
specific alarm then can be reported.
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is described.

Procedure
Step 1 Set water sensor parameters.

In this example, the water sensor is connected to the AI/DI_3 port on the ECC800.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration
page is displayed.
3. Set Device Type to ECC800, set Device Name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Leak and click
Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_3 Port
Settings.
6. Set Leak sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Confirm that Leak sensor type is automatically identified as Leak sensor(Electroc).
Ensure that Leak power supply is Yes, and click Submit.
Step 2 Check functions of water sensors.

Table 8-29 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method


Immerse the two Leak DI alarm is generated on Wipe dry the two contacts of the
contacts of the the active alarm screen of the water sensor. The alarm
electrode water app or on the WebUI. disappears automatically.
sensor in water.

----End

8.1.8.34 How to Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to the
AI/DI Port on the ECC800)?
If a temperature sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on the temperature
sensor, and the other end has been connected to the AI/DI port on the ECC800.

Context
 If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.
 The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is described.
 If multiple temperature sensors are connected, commission them one by one.

Procedure
Step 1 Set temperature sensor parameters.

In this example, the temperature sensor is connected to the AI/DI_2 port on the ECC800.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration
page is displayed.
3. Set Device Type to ECC800, set Device Name to ECC800, and click OK.
4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Temperature and
click Submit.
5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2 Port
Settings.
6. Set Temperature sensor to Enable and click Submit.
7. Confirm that Temperature sensor type is automatically identified as NTC. Ensure that
Temperature power supply is Yes.
Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of the temperature sensor.

Table 8-30 Commissioning the sensor

Check Method Normal Connection Status


View the operating information You can view the current cabinet temperature.
about the temperature sensor on
the WebUI.

----End

8.1.8.35 How to Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to the
NTC Port on the Rack Environment Unit)?
If a temperature sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on the temperature
sensor, and the other end has been connected to the NTC port on the rack environment unit.

Procedure
Step 1 The temperature sensor supports self-discovery and does not need to set parameters.
Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of temperature sensor.

Table 8-31 Commissioning the sensor

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Path: Monitoring > Cabinet > You can view the current cabinet temperature.
IT Cabinet n > Cabinet
Collector n

----End

8.1.8.36 How to Set and Add the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010346)?
If a T/H sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on the temperature
sensor, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the T/H sensor device address.
1. Go to the LCD screen of the T/H sensor. Press SET to go to the ADD screen, and set the
device address to 1 by pressing + or –.
Step 2 Add a T/H sensor.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a T/H sensor.

Table 8-32 Adding a T/H sensor

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device Select Sensor from the drop-down list box.
Settings > attribute
Device
Management Device Type Select T/H sensor from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Device. The Communicatio Select COM3 from the drop-down list box.
parameters for ns Port
adding devices NOTE
are displayed. The setting example indicates that the T/H sensor is
connected to the COM3 port on the ECC800. If the T/H
sensor is connected to another port, enter the number of the
connected port.

Device In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


Address actual configuration, set the device address for the
T/H sensor based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the T/H sensor does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the T/H sensor and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the T/H
sensor and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the T/H sensor parameters.
Step 3 Check functions of the T/H sensor.

Table 8-33 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Check the running information Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
about the T/H sensor on the T/H Sensor n > Running Info, and check the current
WebUI. T/H information of the cabinet.
Set T/H sensor alarm thresholds. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
T/H Sensor n > Running Parameters, and set High
temperature alarm threshold, Low temperature
alarm threshold, High humidity alarm threshold,
and Low humidity alarm threshold as required.
NOTE
The default values of High temperature alarm threshold,
Low temperature alarm threshold, High humidity alarm
threshold, and Low humidity alarm threshold are 30.0°C,
5.0°C, 85.0% RH, and 15.0% RH, respectively.

----End

8.1.8.37 How to Set and Add the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02310NBS)?
If a T/H sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485_IN port on the T/H
sensor, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the T/H sensor device address.
Set the T/H sensor device address through the DIP switch on the T/H sensor.
Toggle switches 1 to 6 of the DIP switch specify the device address in binary mode. ON
indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.

Table 8-34 Setting a device address

Address Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle


Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

Step 2 Add a T/H sensor.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a T/H sensor.

Table 8-35 Adding a T/H sensor

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device Select Sensor from the drop-down list box.
Settings > attribute
Device
Management Device Type Select T/H sensor from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
parameters for Communicatio Select COM3 from the drop-down list box.
adding devices ns Port NOTE
are displayed.
The setting example indicates that the T/H sensor is
connected to the COM3 port on the ECC800. If the T/H
sensor is connected to another port, enter the number of the
connected port.

Device In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


Address actual configuration, set the device address for the
T/H sensor based on the actual situation.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.
− If the T/H sensor does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the T/H sensor and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the T/H
sensor and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the T/H sensor parameters.
Step 3 Check functions of the T/H sensor.

Table 8-36 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Check the running information Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
about the T/H sensor on the T/H Sensorn > Running Info, and check the current
WebUI. T/H information of the cabinet.
Set T/H sensor alarm thresholds. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
T/H Sensorn > Running Parameters, and set High
temperature alarm threshold, Low temperature
alarm threshold, High humidity alarm threshold,
and Low humidity alarm threshold as required.
NOTE
The default values of High temperature alarm threshold,
Low temperature alarm threshold, High humidity alarm
threshold, and Low humidity alarm threshold are 30.0°C,
5.0°C, 85.0% RH, and 15.0% RH, respectively.

----End

8.1.8.38 How to Set and Add the T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG)?

Prerequisites
One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485_IN port on the T/H
sensor, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the T/H sensor device address.
Set the T/H sensor device address through the DIP switch on the T/H sensor.
Toggle switches 1–6 are used to set device addresses, toggle switch 7 is reserved, and toggle
switch 8 is used to switch the temperature unit.
Device addresses are set in binary coding format in the range of 1–63. The first bit is the least
significant bit, and the sixth bit is the most significant bit. ON indicates 1 and OFF indicates
0.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-20 T/H sensor Dip switch

Step 2 Add a T/H sensor.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add a T/H sensor.

Table 8-37 Adding a T/H sensor

Path Parameter Setting


Name
Choose System Device Select Sensor from the drop-down list box.
Settings > attribute
Device
Management Device Type Select T/H sensor from the drop-down list box.
and click Add
Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
Device. The
parameters for Communicatio Select COM3 from the drop-down list box.
adding devices ns Port NOTE
are displayed.
The setting example indicates that the T/H sensor is
connected to the COM3 port on the ECC800. If the T/H
sensor is connected to another port, enter the number of the
connected port.

Device In this example, Device Address is set to 1. During


Address actual configuration, set the device address for the
T/H sensor based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800 properly, click Confirm. The connected
devices are displayed in the Number of connected devices list.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

− If the T/H sensor does not connect to the ECC800 properly, check whether the cable
between the T/H sensor and the ECC800 is connected properly, whether the T/H
sensor and ECC800 are running properly, and whether the input parameters are
consistent with the T/H sensor parameters.
Step 3 Check functions of the T/H sensor.

Table 8-38 Function check

Check Method Normal Connection Status


Check the running information Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
about the T/H sensor on the T/H Sensorn > Running Info, and check the current
WebUI. T/H and NTC information of the cabinet.
Set T/H sensor alarm thresholds. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group >
T/H Sensorn > Running Parameters, and set High
temperature alarm threshold, Low temperature
alarm threshold, High humidity alarm threshold,
and Low humidity alarm threshold as required.
NOTE
The default values of High temperature alarm threshold,
Low temperature alarm threshold, High humidity alarm
threshold, and Low humidity alarm threshold are 30.0°C,
5.0°C, 85.0% RH, and 15.0% RH, respectively.

----End

8.1.9 How to Restore Factory Settings?


Context

Restoring factory settings will restore parameters to their default values. Perform this
operation with caution.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File and click Restore Factory Settings.
Step 3 Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click Submit.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.10 How Do I Install a Network Security Certificate?


Context
 You have copied a network security certificate and its key you obtained to the PC.
 Install a network security certificate if a security certificate problem message is
displayed when you attempt to log in to the ECC800 WebUI.
 You need to apply to an organization authorized by the customer for a network security
certificate and its key with the ECC800 IP address or domain name. This section
describes how to import the certificate and key.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as the administrator.
Step 2 Upload a network security certificate.
1. Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Site Configuration.
2. Select a certificate format from the drop-down list box in the Network Security
Certificate area.
3. Click Select File on the right of Select a network security certificate.
4. Select the network security certificate to be imported from the PC and click Upload.
5. Click Select File on the right of Select a network security certificate key.
6. Select the network security certificate key to be imported from the PC and click Upload.
7. (Optional) If the network security certificate is encrypted, select If an encrypted private
key is imported, enter the password for decryption, and specify Key cryptography
and Confirm key cryptography.
8. Click Submit in the Network Security Certificate area.
----End

8.1.11 How Can I Install a Device Access Certificate?


Context
 You have obtained a device access certificate and the certificate key and have copied the
certificate and key file to the PC.
 A preset certificate is provided for the ECC800 and its connected devices. If a higher
security level is required, replace the certificate both on the ECC800 and the devices.
 You need to apply for a device access certificate from an organization authorized by the
customer, and replace the original certificate on the devices and ECC800.
 This section describes how to import a certificate to the ECC800. For details about how
to import a certificate to devices, see the operation manual of the devices.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Device Management > Security Certificate Change.
Step 3 Click Select File on the right of Upload CA certificate file.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Step 4 Select the certificate to be imported from the PC and click Upload.
Step 5 Click Select File on the right of Upload local certificate file.
Step 6 Select the certificate to be imported from the PC and click Upload.
Step 7 Click Select File on the right of Upload key file.
Step 8 Select the key file to be imported from the PC and click Upload.
Step 9 Specify Key cryptography and Confirm key cryptography.
Step 10 Click Submit.
----End

8.1.12 How Can I Change the ECC800 IP Address on the WebUI?


Context
You have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway information planned for
the ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Monitor IP and change the IP, subnet
mask, and default gateway information for the ECC800 as planned.
Step 3 Click Submit.
Step 4 In the displayed Setting succeeded. Log in again. dialog box, click OK.
----End

8.1.13 How Do I Configure ECC800 Alarm Parameters?


Context
 You can set parameters under Enable Alarm, Severity, Output Dry Contact and
Loudspeaker based on requirements.
− When Enable Alarm is set to Disable for an alarm, the ECC800 will not show this
alarm.
− You can set Severity to Critical, Major, Minor, or Warning as required.
− After an alarm and a DO output are associated over Output Dry Contact, the
device connected to the DO port will act if the alarm is generated.
− If an alarm is associated with the loudspeaker and Loudspeaker is set to Enable,
the loudspeaker produces sound when the alarm is generated.
 You can modify alarm parameters in batches over Batch Setting.
 The setting methods for different alarms are the same. This section describes how to set
the Operation log full alarm for the ECC800.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Alarm Parameters.
Step 3 On the Basic Alarm Parameters page, choose ECC800 from the Select a device type
drop-down list box, choose the ECC800 to be set from the Device name drop-down list box,
and then click Confirm.
Step 4 Set Enable Alarm to Enable or Disable for Operation log full as required. Set Severity to
Critical, Major, Minor, or Warning as required.

To modify Enable Alarm or Severity in batches, click Batch Setting in the left corner of the Basic Alm
Para page, and choose ECC800 from the Select a device type drop-down list box. Set Destination
Parameter of Enable Alarm or Source Parameter and Destination Parameter of Severity, and click
OK.

Step 5 On the Alarm Linkage page, set Device type to ECC800, select Device Type or Device in
the Linkage type column, and click Confirm.
Step 6 (Optional) If you select Device in the Linkage type column, select the ECC800 to be set in
the Device name column.
Step 7 Click Select in the Output Dry Contact column corresponding to Operation log full as
required, select Yes or No for DO1 or DO2, and click OK.

Select a DO not used by other functions. Otherwise, the association setting fails.

Step 8 Click Select in the Loudspeaker column corresponding to Operation log full as required, set
Loudspeaker to Yes or No, and click OK.
----End

8.1.14 How Can I View Real-Time Monitoring Data, Active


Alarms, Historical Alarms, Access Event, and Operation Logs?
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Click Monitoring, select the device to be viewed, and select Running Info to view the
real-time data of the device.
Step 3 Choose Home > Active Alarms to view the active alarms of the ECC800. Click Details in
the Alarm Details area to view alarm details of devices.
Step 4 Choose Query to view the historical alarms, access events, and operation logs of the device.
1. View historical alarms, choose Query > Historical Alarms. Set Device, Start time,
End time, Sort mode and Sorting By, and click Query.
2. To view access events, choose Query > Access Event.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

3. To view operation logs, choose Query > Operation Log.


----End

8.1.15 How Can I Handle Alarms?


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI.
Step 2 Choose Home > Active Alarms and view active alarms.
Step 3 Select an alarm to be acknowledged and click Confirm.

Figure 8-21 Acknowledging an alarm

Step 4 Handle an alarm based on the alarm information.


Step 5 Select an alarm to be cleared and click Clear Alarm.

The cleared alarm is displayed in the historical alarm list.

----End

8.1.16 How Can I View Performance Data?


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Query > Performance Data.
Step 3 Set Device, Performance data, Statistics mode, Start time, and End time, and click Query.
----End

8.1.17 How Is a Signal Name Changed?


Context
 In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_3 port on the ECC800.
 The following procedure describes how to change the signal name of AI/DI_3. Other
signal names can be changed in a similar way.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal Configuration page is
displayed.
Step 3 Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.
Step 4 On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Smoke and click
Submit.
Step 5 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_3 Port Settings.
Check that the signal name of AI/DI_3 has been changed to Smoke.
----End

8.1.18 How Can I Export Historical Data and Device Data?


Context
 Export Historical Data: You can export historical alarms, active alarms, performance data,
operation logs, and access events of the system for viewing and analyzing events.
 Export Device Data: You can export device data in system.
 If Encryption Password is selected, the exported data package will be encrypted, and
you need to enter the encryption password to decompress the data package. To ensure
data security, you are advised to select Encryption Password.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Select Query > Export Data.
Step 3 (Optional) Select Encryption password for export and enter an encryption password.

Record the password for decompressing the data package.

Step 4 Export historical data and local data of southbound devices, and select a save path to save the
exported data to the PC.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-22 Exporting data

 Data can be exported from the integrated PDF, integrated UPS, iBOX, smart cooling product, and
other devices that have the local data storage function.
 If a USB flash drive is inserted, click Export Historical Data or Export Local Data of
Southbound Devices of Southbound Devices, and specify a save path to save exported data to the
USB flash drive.

----End

8.1.19 How Can I Export or Import a Configuration File?


Context
You can export parameter configurations for ECC800_1 to a PC. If ECC800_2 needs the
same parameter configurations, import the configuration file to ECC800_2.

ECC800_2 and ECC800_1 must have the same type and number of connected devices.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800_1 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File.
Step 3 Export a configuration file.
1. Specify Configuration file encryption password.

Record the password for importing a configuration file.


2. Click Back Up Current Settings.
Step 4 Import a configuration file.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

 Before importing the configuration file, ensure that the current system type is the same as
the system type when the configuration file is exported.
 The ECC800_2 will restart after you import the configuration file.

1. Log in to the ECC800_2 WebUI as an administrator.


2. Choose Maintenance > Configuration File.
3. Specify Configuration file decryption password.
4. Click Select File on the right of Import configuration file.
5. Select the configuration file to be imported, and click Upload.
----End

8.1.20 How Can I Export Fault Information?


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800_1 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Maintenance > > Fault Information.
Step 3 (Optional) Select Encryption password for export and enter an encryption password

If Encryption password is selected, the exported data package will be encrypted, and you
need to enter the encryption password to decompress the data package. To ensure data security,
you are advised to select Encryption password for export.

Record the password for decompressing the data package.

Step 4 Export fault information and save the exported data to the PC or USB flash drive.

Figure 8-23 Exporting information to PC

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-24 Exporting information to USB flash drive

----End

8.1.21 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters?


Context
 Do not delete the source devices before replacing devices.
 After replacing devices, you can choose to synchronize configured device parameters to
the target devices.
 Source Device: device before replacement
 Target Device: device after replacement

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as the administrator.
Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Parameter Sync.
Step 3 Select a value from the Device type drop-down list box.
Step 4 Specify source device and target device, click Submit.

If communication between the ECC800 and the device is interrupted during parameter
synchronization, the synchronization fails. Ensure that the ECC800 and the device
communicate properly and synchronize parameters again.

The source device can be a device that communicates properly or fails to communicate, but the target
device must be a device that communicates properly.

----End

8.1.22 How Can I Handle DO Association Failure?


Context
 If DO association fails, the DO port to be associated may be used by other functions.
Check whether the DO port is used.
 Two ECC800 functions may use a DO port: Linkage control and alarm linkage.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Check whether the DO port is used.
 Choose System Settings > Alarm Parameters and check whether the DO port is used.
 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control and check whether the DO port is used.
Step 3 After changing the DO port state to idle, associate the DO port again. If the association still
fails, contact Huawei technical support.
----End

8.1.23 What Do I Do If the ECC800 WebUI Display Language


Changes from Chinese to English During Use?
Context
Cause: The browser cookies are deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 Manually refresh the browser page.
----End

8.1.24 What Do I Do If the ECC800 Fails to Communicate with the


UPS5000-E?
Procedure
Step 1 Tap System Info on the LCD after the UPS is started.

Step 2 Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name and password, and tap .

The preset user name is admin and the preset password is 000001.

Step 3 Choose Settings > Advanced and set Modbus TCP encryption to Disable.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.25 What Do I Do If a Message Indicating Unauthorized


Fingerprint Is Displayed During Fingerprint Scanning on the
Access Control Device (Fingerprint Has Been Recorded)?
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that no obstacles exist in front of the fingerprint, and then scan the fingerprint on the
access control device again.
Step 2 If the message indicating unauthorized fingerprint is still displayed after you perform Step 1,
you need to synchronize the fingerprint information.
1. Choose System Settings > Access Management. On the Authorization Operations tab
page, click Synchronize to Device, select the device for synchronizing fingerprint
information, and click Start Synchronization.
2. After the Synchronization Status of the device becomes Synchronized, close the
Synchronize Access Permission page.
3. Scan the fingerprint on the access control device again.
Step 3 If the message indicating unauthorized fingerprint is still displayed after you perform Step 1
and Step 2, you need to record the user's fingerprint again.
1. Choose System Settings > Access Management.
2. Select the involved user and record the fingerprint again.
----End

8.1.26 How Can I Rectify Camera Access Restriction?


Prerequisites
If Huawei S12700 series switch is used, refer to this section to rectify the fault. For more
information, consult network engineers.

Context
The camera is inaccessible after the MAC address and IP address are bound in network
configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Use the free-rule configuration method. Configure the free-rule MAC address so that users
can access the network without authentication. For the configuration method, see the section
authentication free-rule in S12700 V200R008C00 Product Documentation.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.27 How Should I Add the Devices Accessed Through a Smart


ETH Gateway over Modbus-TCP to the ECC800 WebUI?
Prerequisites
The device supports DHCP.

Context

Figure 8-25 Network diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the device communication mode has been set to DHCP.
Step 2 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator, and check whether the device exists on the
Monitoring page.
 If the device exists, and communication status is normal, the device has accessed the
ECC800 successfully.

Figure 8-26 Device accessed the ECC800

 If the device does not exist, check that the cable is properly connected between the
device and the ECC800, the ECC800 is operating properly, and communications
parameters are set correctly.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Follow-up Procedure
Choose Home > Plan View on the ECC800 WebUI, and drag the device to the corresponding
position in the Smart Module View pane based on the actual device layout.

8.1.28 How Should I Add the Devices Accessed Through a Smart


ETH Gateway over Modbus-MAC to the ECC800 WebUI?
Context
The device that supports Modbus-MAC can be automatically identified by the ECC800.

Figure 8-27 Network diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator, and check whether the device exists on the
Monitoring page.
The following is an example of confirming the access of a WiFi converter.
 If the device exists, and communication status is normal, the device has accessed the
ECC800 successfully.

Figure 8-28 Device accessed the ECC800

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

 If the device does not exist, check that the cable is properly connected between the
device and the ECC800 and that the device and ECC800 are operating properly.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Choose Home > Plan View on the ECC800 WebUI, and drag the device to the corresponding
position in the Smart Module View pane based on the actual device layout.

8.1.29 How Should I Add Devices Accessed Through the ETH


Converter to the ECC800 WebUI?
Context

Figure 8-29 Network diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Set communications parameters on the device.

Table 8-39 Description of communications parameters to be set on a device

Parameter Recommended Value

Baud rate This section uses 9600 as an example. Set this parameter
based on site requirements.
NOTE
For certain devices, this parameter does not need to be set.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Parameter Recommended Value


Communications address This section uses 1 as an example. Set this parameter based on
site requirements.

Step 2 Add the device to the ECC800 WebUI.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as the administrator.
2. Add the device.

Table 8-40 Parameter description for adding a device

Path Parameter Setting


Choose System Device attribute Select the device attribute to be accessed from the
Settings > drop-down list box.
Device
Management Device Type Select the device type to be accessed from the
and click Add drop-down list box.
Device. The
Connect To Select the corresponding ETH converter from the
parameters for
drop-down list box.
adding devices
are displayed. NOTE
Use the blinking function of the ETH converter to identify
the mapping between the device and the ETH converter.

Communications Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-down list box.


Port
Device Address This section uses 1 as an example. In practice, set
this parameter to be the same as the
communications address for the device.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the device connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the independent deployment AI_DI unit connects to the ECC800 properly, click
Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected
devices list.
− If the connection is not proper, check that the cable is properly connected between
the device and the ECC800, that the device and ECC800 are running properly, and
that the input parameters are consistent with the device parameters.
4. Choose Monitoring > System > ETH Converter Group > ETH Converter n >
Running Parameters and set Device name to ETH Converter n_Device name.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Choose Home > Plan View on the ECC800 WebUI, and drag the device to the corresponding
position in the Smart Module View pane based on the actual device layout.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.30 How Should I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800


COM Port to the ECC800 WebUI
Prerequisites
This section uses the device connecting to the COM1 port on the ECC800 as an example.

Context

Figure 8-30 Network diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Set communications parameters on the device.

Table 8-41 Description of communications parameters to be set on a device

Parameter Recommended Value


Baud rate This section uses 9600 as an example. Set this parameter
based on site requirements.
NOTE
For certain devices, this parameter does not need to be set.

Communications address This section uses 1 as an example. Set this parameter based on
site requirements.

Step 2 Add the device to the ECC800 WebUI.


1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Add the device.

Table 8-42 Parameter description for adding a device

Path Parameter Setting


Choose System Device attribute Select the device attribute to be accessed from the
Settings > drop-down list box.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Path Parameter Setting


Device Device Type Select the device type to be accessed from the
Management drop-down list box.
and click Add
Device. The Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.
parameters for
adding devices Communications Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.
are displayed. Port NOTE
The setting example indicates that the device connects to
the COM1 port on the ECC800. If the device connects to
another port, enter the number of the connected port.

Device Address This section uses 1 as an example. In practice, set


this parameter to be the same as the
communications address for the device.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the device connects to the ECC800 properly.
− If the independent deployment AI_DI unit connects to the ECC800 properly, click
Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected
devices list.
− If the connection is not proper, check that the cable is properly connected between
the device and the ECC800, that the device and ECC800 are running properly, and
that the input parameters are consistent with the device parameters.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
Choose Home > Plan View on the ECC800 WebUI, and drag the device to the corresponding
position in the Smart Module View pane based on the actual device layout.

8.1.31 How Should I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800


AI/DI Port to the ECC800 WebUI
Prerequisites
This section uses the device connecting to the AI/DI_1 port on the ECC800 as an example.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Context

Figure 8-31 Network diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Add the device.

Table 8-43 Parameter description for adding a device

Path Parameter Setting


Monitoring > AI/DI_1 sensor Select Enable and click Submit
System >
ECC800 > AI/DI_1 sensor Select the type of the device to be accessed from
Running type the drop-down list box.
Parameters > NOTE
AI/DI_1 Port The device types (excluding normal open and normal
Settings close) can be automatically identified for devices
except for door sensor and leak sensor (Electroc) after
NOTE connection.
The setting example
indicates that the AI/DI_1 power The default value is Enable.
device connects to supply
the AI/DI_1 port on
the ECC800. If the
device connects to
another port, enter
the number of the
connected port.

Step 3 After setting all mandatory parameters, click Submit.


----End

Follow-up Procedure
Choose Home > Plan View on the ECC800 WebUI, and drag the device to the corresponding
position in the Smart Module View pane based on the actual device layout.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.32 How Should I Open Doors Remotely over the ECC800


WebUI
Context
If O&M personnel need to enter a smart module but do not take an access cord or forget the
password, you can open the door remotely over the ECC800 WebUI.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Open the aisle door.

Table 8-44 Operations for opening a door remotely

Path Setting
Monitoring > Aisle > Access Select Remote door opening and click Submit
Actuator Group > Access
Actuator n > Controls

Remotely opening the door may open the smart module door, and this may pose security risks.
Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

Example
The following figure shows how to remotely open the aisle door controlled by access actuator
1.

Figure 8-32 Opening a door remotely

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.33 How Should I Turn On or Off Aisle Lights in the Smart


Module over the ECC800 WebUI?
Context
 If O&M personnel forget to turn off lights when exiting the data center, you can remotely
turn off the lights over the ECC800 WebUI.
 When the local light button is faulty or lights cannot be turned on through a linkage, you
can remotely turn on the lights over the ECC800 WebUI.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Turn on or off aisle lights.

Table 8-45 Operations for turning on or off aisle lights

Path Setting
Monitoring > Aisle > AC Set Set light mode is Manual.
Actuator Group > AC
Actuator n > Running
Parameters
Monitoring > Aisle > AC Select Remote open scuttle, select ON or OFF as
Actuator Group > AC required, and click Submit.
Actuator n > Controls

----End

Example
The following figure shows how to turn on or off the lights controlled by AC actuator 2.

Figure 8-33 Turning on or off aisle lights

Follow-up Procedure
Set Set light mode is Automatic.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.34 How Should I Opening Skylights Remotely over the


ECC800 WebUI?
Context
You can open skylights over the ECC800 WebUI in emergencies.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Open skylights.

Table 8-46 Operations for opening skylights

Path Setting
Monitoring > Aisle > Skylight Select Remote open scuttle and click Submit
Actuator Group > Skylight
Actuator n > Controls

Remotely opening the skylight may open the smart module skylight, and this may pose
security risks. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

----End

Example
The following figure shows how to open the skylights controlled by skylight actuator 1.

Figure 8-34 Opening skylights

Follow-up Procedure
After the maintenance is complete, O&M personnel need to close the skylights in the smart
module manually.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.1.35 How Should I Turn On or Off Smart Cooling Products over


the ECC800 WebUI?
Context
You can turn on or off smart cooling products over the ECC800 WebUI in emergencies.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Turn on or off smart cooling products.

Table 8-47 Operations for turning on or off smart cooling products

Path Setting
Monitoring > Cooling > Select On/Off control, select ON or OFF as required,
NetCol n > Controls and click Submit.

----End

Example
The following figure shows how to turn on or off the NetCol5000–A025.

Figure 8-35 Turning on or off smart cooling products

8.1.36 How Should I Open the Cabinet Electronic Lock over the
ECC800 WebUI
Context
When O&M personnel need to open a cabinet for maintenance, you can open the cabinet
electronic lock over the ECC800 WebUI.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Step 2 Open the cabinet electronic lock.

Table 8-48 Operations for opening a cabinet electronic lock

Path Operation
Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Select Remote and click Submit.
Cabinet n > E-LOCK n

----End

Example
The following figure shows how to open electronic lock 1 for IT cabinet 1.

Figure 8-36 Opening a cabinet electronic lock

Follow-up Procedure
After the maintenance is complete, O&M personnel need to close the cabinet door manually.

8.1.37 How Should I Link the Smoke Alarm with the Alarm
Beacon over the ECC800 WebUI
Prerequisites
The alarm beacon is connected to the DO port on the ECC800.

Context
This section describes how to set an alarm linkage by linking output dry contact of the smoke
alarm on the multi-functional sensor to the DO2 port.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

After the smoke alarm is linked with the alarm beacon, if smoke is detected inside the smart
module, the alarm beacon connecting to the corresponding DO2 port will generate an audible
and visual alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Alarm Parameter > Alarm Linkage.
Step 2 Select Multi-Func Sensor for Device Type, select Device Type or Device for Linkage type,
and click Confirm.

Select Multi-Func Sensor n from the Device Name list if you have selected Device for Linkage type,
and click Confirm.

Step 3 Click Select in the Output Dry Contact list for Smoke alarm. On the Set Dry Contact
Outputs(Multi-Func Sensor) page, set DO2 to Yes and click OK.
Step 4 Click Select in the loudspeaker list for Smoke alarm. On the Please set the
sound(Multi-Func Sensor) page, set loudspeaker to Yes and click OK.
----End

8.1.38 How should I Link the AI/DI Alarm with the Alarm Beacon
over the ECC800 WebUI
Prerequisites
The alarm beacon is connected to the DO port on the ECC800.

Context
After the AI/DI alarm is linked with the alarm beacon, if smoke is detected inside the smart
module, the alarm beacon connecting to the corresponding DO port will generate an audible
and visual alarm.
This section describes how to set an alarm linkage by linking output dry contact of the smoke
DI alarm on the AI/DI_1 sensor to the DO2 port.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Alarm Parameter > Alarm Linkage.
Step 2 Select ECC800 for Device type, select Device Type or Device for Linkage type, and click
Confirm.

Select ECC800 from the Device name list if you have selected Device for Linkage type, and click
Confirm.

Step 3 Click Select in the Output Dry Contact list for AI/DI_1 DI alarm. On the Set Dry Contact
Outputs(ECC800) page, set DO2 to Yes and click OK.
Step 4 Click Select in the loudspeaker list for AI/DI_1 DI alarm. On the Please set the
sound(ECC800) page, set loudspeaker to Yes and click OK.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

----End

8.1.39 How Should I Modify Device Names over the ECC800


WebUI
Context
 When a device name does not correspond to the actual location or needs optimizing, you
can modify the device name over the ECC800 WebUI.
 The following describes how to modify the name of the smart ETH gateway.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Modify the device name.

Table 8-49 Operations for modifying a device name

Path Setting
Monitoring > System > Smart Select Device name, enter the new name in the text box
ETH Gateway Group > as planned, and click Submit.
Smart ETH Gateway 1 >
Running Parameters

----End

Example

Figure 8-37 Modifying a device name

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.2 APP Operations


8.2.1 How to Connect to a WiFi Network
Procedure
Step 1 Connecting to a WiFi network.
Insert a WiFi module into the USB port on the ECC800.

Figure 8-38 Installing a WiFi module

----End

8.2.2 How to Prepare and Login App


Prerequisites
App operating environment requirements:
 The mobile device must run Android 4.0 or later and is not root operation system (the
operating system is not flashed).
 The mobile device has sufficient battery reserve.
 You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800 as well as the user name and password
used for WebUI login.
 A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800 is prepared,
and the PC has connected to port WAN_1 on the ECC800.

Procedure
Step 1 Download and obtain the app installation package using any of the following three methods:
 Log in to HUAWEI App Store (http://a.vmall.com/) or Google Play, search for
FusionModule, and tap Download.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

− Outside China: Tap the Google play app and search for FusionModule.
− In China:
i. Set the pad language to Chinese.
ii. Open the browser on the pad, enter www.baidu.com in the address box, search
for HUAWEI App Store, select Ordinary Download, and tap Save.

Do not use the Google Play to download the HUAWEI App Store.

iii. Install the HUAWEI App Store. If the downloaded file exists in the drop-down
list box, tap the file to install the HUAWEI App Store. If the downloaded file
does not exist in the drop-down list box, choose File > Local on the desktop,
find the Download folder, and click the HUAWEI App Store installation
package.

After you open the HUAWEI App Store, select NOT NOW if "New Version" is displayed.
 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI using a PC. Choose Maintenance > App Obtaining, scan
QR code, and save the app installation package to the PC or a path on the mobile storage
device. Then, copy the app installation package to a mobile phone or pad.
 When the WiFi is enabled, enter https://192.168.245.10 in the address bar of the Firefox
browser (version 41.0 or later) on a mobile phone or pad, and press Enter to access the
ECC800 WebUI. Choose Maintenance > App Obtaining and scan QR code to save the
app package to the mobile phone or pad.
Step 2 Install the app.
By default, the Android operating system forbids the installation of apps not obtained from the
Android market. Therefore, before installing the app, set the mobile phone so that it allows
the installation of apps from unknown sources.
1. Tap the app installation file for installation. After the installation is complete, check that

the app icon is displayed on the home screen of the mobile phone or pad.
Step 3 Enable the WiFi function on the ECC800 WebUI.
1. Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
2. Choose Monitoring > System > WiFi Converter and click WiFi Management.
3. Set Enable WiFi to Enable and click Submit.
4. If this is the first time you enable the WiFi function, set WiFi Password and click OK.
5. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click Submit.
6. Specify WiFi SSID and WiFi Password and click Submit to change the SSID and
password.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

 If you have set a password when enabling WiFi for the first time, you do not need to set the
password again.
 The WiFi function is disabled by default. If you need to use the WiFi function, enable it over the
WebUI. When you enable the WiFi function, change the WiFi password to ensure connection
security.
 A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked. The risk
increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi password once half a year.
7. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click Submit.
Step 4 Log in to the app.
1. Start the mobile phone or pad app, choose Settings > Network Connection on the login
screen, select WiFi SSID specified on the WebUI, and enter the value of WiFi
Password specified on the WebUI for login.
2. On the login screen, choose Settings > Server IP Settings, and ensure that the IP
address is 192.168.245.10.
3. The user name and login password for the app are the same as those for the ECC800
WebUI. Specify the user name and password, and tap Login.

 After the first login, change the password in time to ensure system access security.
 When the mobile phone app connects to the monitoring system, the WiFi function of the monitoring
system is disabled by default. Before connecting the mobile phone app to the monitoring system,
enable the WiFi function on the WebUI. For security, you are advised to disable the WiFi function
when the app is not in use.
 A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked. The risk
increases along with the time of use. Change the password once three months.
 You are advised to use a mobile phone that has not been rooted to reduce the risk of information
leakage.
 It is recommended that you use different user names to log in to both the ECC800 WebUI and app at
the same time. If you use the same user name to log in to the WebUI and app at the same time, either
of them will be forcibly logged out.
 If an exception in network or an unexpected exit from the app occurs, the original user can log in
immediately and the newly-added user need to wait 5 more minutes to log in.

----End

8.2.3 How Do I Ensure that Device Positions in the Plan View Are
Consistent with Actual Positions?
Prerequisites
The smart module plan view has been created, and the device positions in the plan view are
consistent with actual positions.

Context
The rack environment unit is used as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 mobile phone or pad app as an administrator.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

Step 2 Choose Home > More > iFind.


Step 3 Tap Cabinet Collector n Blink to deliver a blinking command. The corresponding device in
the smart module blinks. Check that the device positions and types in the plan view are
consistent with the actual situation by delivering the blinking command.

Figure 8-39 Rack environment unit blinking

----End

8.2.4 How to View Real-time Data?


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 mobile phone or pad app as an administrator.
Step 2 To view the smart module data center layout, tap Home.
Step 3 To view active alarms and historical alarms, choose Alarms > Active Alarms or Alarms >
Historical Alarms.
Step 4 Choose More to view network parameters, operation logs, asset details, and version
information.
----End

8.2.5 How Can I Export and Import Data?


Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 mobile phone or pad app as an administrator.
Step 2 Export device configuration data or historical data.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

1. Choose More > Export Data.


2. Select Local or USB from the Select export location drop-down list box.
3. (Optional) Select Select the encryption mode and enter an encryption password.
4. Select a value from the drop-down list box in the Export Device Configuration Data or
Export Historical Data area.
5. Tap Export.
Step 3 Export the current configuration file.
1. Choose More > Export Data.
2. Enter the encryption password and click Export.
Step 4 Import data.
1. Choose More > Import Data.
2. Select Local or USB from the Select import location drop-down list box.
3. The configuration file is encrypted, enter the password in the Decryption Password text
box.
4. Select a configuration file and tap Import.

The ECC800 will restart after you import the configuration file.

----End

8.2.6 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters?


Context
After a device is replaced, you can synchronize the parameters of the original device to the
new device.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 mobile phone or pad app as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose Parameter Sync.

 Path for choosing Parameter Sync for the ECC800 V100R002C10 version: More > Parameter
Sync
 Path for choosing Parameter Sync for the ECC800 V100R002C00 version: More > System
Maintenance > Parameter Sync

Step 3 Select the source device and target device.


 Source device: device before replacement
 Target device: device after replacement
Step 4 Complete the operation.
 Tap Submit on the pad app.
 Tap Finish on the mobile phone app.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 8 FAQ

----End

8.2.7 How Can I Handle App Login Failure?


Context
If the message The IP is already used is displayed when you attempt to log in to the mobile
phone or pad app, perform the operations in this section to handle the issue.

Procedure
Step 1 If you have obtained the user name and password used in the previous successful login,
perform the following operations:
1. Check that the mobile phone or pad connects to the ECC800 over WiFi properly.
2. Use the obtained user name and password to log in to the app and exit.
3. Use the user name and password that previously failed the login to log in to the app
again.
Step 2 If you have not obtained the user name and password used in a previous successful login,
perform the following operations:
1. Close the app and wait 4–5 minutes.
2. Use the user name and password that previously failed the login to log in to the app
again.
----End

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 9 PLC Function

9 PLC Function

9.1 Linkage Control Introduction


The ECC800 provides the linkage control function. You can set logic rules and control the DO
output signal by collecting the signal value.
You can select signals (such as the AI/DI device status signals) and perform logic operations
such as AND, OR, NOT, GREATER THAN, LESS THAN, DELAY, and FILTER. The
operation result can be provided to the dry contact to meet the site control requirements.

Logic Parameters
The following are the inputs, operators, and outputs for linkage control logic programs:
 Inputs:
− Sample: Such as AI/DI device signals.
− Alarm: Such as AI/DI alarm signals.
− Constant
− Register: A register can combine multiple levels of logic programs.
 Operators:
− AND: The output is valid if both inputs are valid.
− OR: The output is valid if either input is valid.
− NOT: The output is the inverse value of the input signal or constant.
− >: The output is active if the input is greater than the constant.
− <: The output is active if the input is less than the constant.
− DELAY: The output of the input signal or constant is delayed and the output is
constant.
− FILTER: The output is active if the input reaches the constant.
 Outputs:
− Outputs are associated with dry contact outputs and can be used for generating
alarms or controlling devices.
− Register: A register can combine multiple levels of logic programs.
− Alarm: The operation result is generated as a new alarm.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 9 PLC Function

Feature Description
The linkage control configuration is concise and easy to operate. You can perform the
following operations:
 Configure linkage control logic programs on the WebUI for display.
 Import or export configuration files.
 Restore the default linkage control configuration by one click.
The following are descriptions of the WebUI:
 Basic Parameters: The configurations of the linkage control logic programs are valid if
Enable linkage control function is set to Yes.
 Linkage group: You can configure Linkage groups by type.
 Linkage Logical List: You can configure logic program lines.
 Import and Export: You can import or export configuration files to generate logic
program lines in batches.
 Restore configuration: You can click Restore Factory Defaults to restore the default
linkage control configurations.

9.2 Linkage Control Configuration Examples


Context

 Linkage control does not need to be configured onsite and its default configuration applies.
Before adding or modifying linkage control linkage logic, consult Huawei engineers.
 When you do not know how to rectify the incorrect linkage control configuration or want
to synchronize the linkage control configuration from another ECC800, use the linkage
control configuration import and export function.
 The ECC800 supports fire control linkage and high temperature linkage control. For
example, the ECC800 can implement fire linkage by detecting fire alarms through the
fire controller and opening the skylight, opening the aisle door, and shutting down the
smart cooling product based on the alarm status.
 The following describes how to configure the linkage control linkage, using Link fire
control with skylight open as an example.
 In this example, the fire controller connects to the AI/DI_1 port. The actual port prevails.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the ECC800 WebUI as an administrator.
Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.
Step 3 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.
Step 4 Add or edit a linkage group name.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 9 PLC Function

1. On the Linkage Group tab page, click Add.


2. In the displayed Add Logical Group dialog box, set Group name to Link fire
extinguishing with skylight open.
3. Click OK.

For details about how to add or edit a linkage group name for high temperature linkage control, see Step
4.

Step 5 Add or edit a logic program.


1. Select the edited linkage group name on the Linkage Group tab page.
2. On the Linkage Logical List tab page, click Add or the edit icon .
3. Click Submit.
 Set Linkage Logic List parameters for Link fire control with skylight open.

Figure 9-1 Setting parameters for Linkage Logic List

 Set Linkage Logic List parameters for Link high temperature with skylight open.

When adding high temperature linkage control, ensure that all smart cooling products fail to
communicate with the ECC800. If smart cooling products communicate properly, cooling can be
automatically implemented when the smart cooling products are at high temperature. Opening the
skylights may cause the cooling effect to fail.

Figure 9-2 Parameters for connecting to the temperature sensor

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 9 PLC Function

Figure 9-3 Parameters for connecting to the temperature and humidity sensor

----End

Follow-up Procedure
You can use the configuration file import and export function to export the linkage control
linkage rules configured for an ECC800 to a local PC and then import the rules to another
ECC800. This function achieves quick configuration for the linkage control.

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 10 Acronyms and Abbreviations

10 Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC alternating current
AES Advanced encryption standard
AI analog input
APP application

B
BCB battery control I/O board

C
COM component object model

D
DC direct current
DES Data Encryption Standard
DI digital input
DO digital output

E
ECC energy control center
ESN equipment serial number
ETH Ethernet

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 10 Acronyms and Abbreviations

FE fast Ethernet

I
iBAT iBattery
IC integrated circuit
iCooling iCooling
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IP Internet Protocol
IT Internet technology

L
LED light emitting diode

M
MTBF mean time between failures
MTTR mean time to repair
MAC Media Access Control
MD5 message digest algorithm
Mib Mib

N
NAT network address translation
NetEco iManager NetEco data center infrastructure management
system
NTC negative temperature coefficient

P
PDU power distribution unit
POE power over Ethernet
PSU power supply unit
PUE power usage effectiveness

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267


ECC800 Data Center Controller
User Manual 10 Acronyms and Abbreviations

RF radio frequency
RH relative humidity
RJ Registered Jack
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances

S
SD secure digital
SHA Secure Hash Algorithm
SIM subscriber identity module
SMS short message service
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SSL Secure Sockets Layer
SSID service set identifier

T
TLS Transport Layer Security

U
UPS uninterruptible power system
USB universal serial bus

V
VCN video cloud node

W
WiFi wireless fidelity
WPS WiFi protected setup

Issue 07 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

You might also like